Sie sind auf Seite 1von 230

ALFOplus

Access Link Full Outdoor

User Manual

MN.00273.E - 004

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.


Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

Contents

Section 1.
USER GUIDE

1
2

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7


FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8
2.1

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ..................................................................... 8


2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................. 8
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8

2.2

SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................10

2.3

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &


ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................11

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................12


3.1

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................12

3.2

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................12

3.3

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................12

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION

LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15


4.1

15

LIST OF ACRONYMS ..........................................................................................15

SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................17


5.1

GENERAL.........................................................................................................17

5.2

APPLICATIONS .................................................................................................17
5.2.1 Functionality ..........................................................................................18

5.3
6

PROGRAMMABILITY ..........................................................................................18

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................23


6.1

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ..............................................................................23

6.2

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................25
6.2.1 Adaptive modulation ...............................................................................39

6.3

LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................42


6.3.1 Ethernet optical interface characteristics ....................................................46

MN.00273.E - 004

6.4

POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE ...............................................................................46


6.4.1 PoE injector ...........................................................................................47

6.5

6.4.1.1

PoE injector functionality ...........................................................47

6.4.1.2

Code table...............................................................................48

6.4.1.3

Electrical characteristics ............................................................49

6.4.1.4

Connectors ..............................................................................49

6.4.1.5

Description of alarms ................................................................49

WAVEGUIDE FLANGE ........................................................................................50

6.6

MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................51

6.7

SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................................51

6.8

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................51

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................52


7.1

GENERAL.........................................................................................................52
7.1.1 Block diagram ........................................................................................52
7.1.2 Baseband processor ................................................................................55
7.1.2.1

Firmware ................................................................................55

7.1.2.2

Web Lct ..................................................................................55

7.1.2.3

Alarm system ..........................................................................55

7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit ...............................................................................56


7.1.4 Switch for Ethernet ports .........................................................................56
7.1.5 Synchronisation ......................................................................................58
7.1.6 Adaptive code modulation ........................................................................59
7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction ........................................................................60
7.2

LOOPS ............................................................................................................62

7.3

RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING ..................................................62


7.3.1 Rate limiting ..........................................................................................62
7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2) ...............................62

7.4

CONGESTION AVOIDANCE .................................................................................65

7.5

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................72


7.5.1 Service layer OAM...................................................................................72

7.6

ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON ..................................................74

7.7

RMON COUNTERS .............................................................................................75

7.8

ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS .......76


7.8.1 Priority RMON.........................................................................................76
7.8.2 Service RMON ........................................................................................77

7.9

SYNCHRONISM.................................................................................................77

7.10

SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM .............................................................................79

7.11

PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT .............................................80

7.12

G.8264 SSM SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE...........................................81


7.12.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces ......................................................................82

Section 3.
INSTALLATION

85

INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ......................................................................85


8.1

GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION..........................85

8.2

GENERAL.........................................................................................................86

8.3

ELECTRICAL WIRING.........................................................................................86

MN.00273.E - 004

8.4

CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS ................................................................86

8.5

GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................87


8.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (universal - no tools).87

8.6
8.7

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................89


INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................................................................89
8.7.1 Standard coupling kit ..............................................................................89

8.8

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .............89
8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................89

8.9

8.8.1.1

1+0 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90

8.8.1.2

1+1 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................90

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...............92


8.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................92

8.10
8.11

8.9.1.1

1+0 ODU with separated antenna...............................................92

8.9.1.2

1+1 ODU with separated antenna...............................................93

8.9.1.3

Waveguide towards the antenna.................................................93

GROUNDING ....................................................................................................94
USER CONNECTORS........................................................................................ 101
8.11.1 Auxiliary connector ............................................................................... 101
8.11.2 RJ45 connector..................................................................................... 103
8.11.3 Optical connector .................................................................................. 112
8.11.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure ............................................................. 113
8.11.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure .......................................................... 113

Section 4.
LINE-UP

119

LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ...............................................................................119


9.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 119

9.2

SWITCH ON ................................................................................................... 119

9.3

ALARM LED CHECK ......................................................................................... 120

9.4

CONNECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................... 120

9.5

FIRST CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 122

9.6

OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT ............................... 127

9.7

ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT.................................................... 130

9.8

COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ........................................ 131


9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability .................................................................. 131

9.9

FIRMWARE .................................................................................................... 132

9.10

BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF


MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS ......................................................................... 133
9.10.1 Scope.................................................................................................. 133
9.10.2 Configuration upload and download using SCT .......................................... 133
9.10.3 Configuration upload and download using WEBLCT .................................... 134

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 5.
MAINTENANCE

135

10 ALFOPlus ALARMS AND LOOPS...............................................................................135


10.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 135

10.2

ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 135


10.2.1 Alarm indications .................................................................................. 135
10.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms................................................................ 136

11 ALFOPlus MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................139


11.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 139

11.2

MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 139


11.2.1 Periodical checks .................................................................................. 139
11.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) ................................................ 140

11.3

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 140


11.3.1 Faulty condition detection ...................................................................... 140
11.3.2 Troubleshooting of a faulty unit .............................................................. 141

Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

143

12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................143


12.1
12.2

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 143
SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET.................................................................. 143
12.2.1 General ............................................................................................... 144
12.2.2 Configurations ...................................................................................... 145
12.2.3 "Local Access only" management ............................................................ 145
12.2.4 "VLAN based in-band" management ........................................................ 146
12.2.5 "VLAN based In-band" drop node ............................................................ 146
12.2.6 "Out-of-band" management ................................................................... 147
12.2.7 Configurability ...................................................................................... 147
12.2.8 Address ............................................................................................... 147
12.2.9 Restore supervisioning access mode ........................................................ 147

Section 7.
COMPOSITION

149

13 COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................149
13.1

GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 149

13.2

ALFOPLUS SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL ............................................................ 149

13.3

AVAILABLE ALFOPLUS VERSIONS ..................................................................... 149

13.4

ODU INSTALLATION KIT .................................................................................. 154

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 8.
ADDENDUM

155

14 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................155
14.1

GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 155

15 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................156


15.1
15.2

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 156


GENERAL....................................................................................................... 156
15.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 156
15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 161
15.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 162
15.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 164
15.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 165
15.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 165

16 ALFOPLUS 13GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................166


16.1
16.2

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 166


GENERAL....................................................................................................... 166
16.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 166
16.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 169
16.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 170
16.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 172
16.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 172
16.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 172

17 ALFOPLUS 15GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................173


17.1
17.2

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 173


GENERAL....................................................................................................... 173
17.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 173
17.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 181
17.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 182
17.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 184
17.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 184
17.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 184

18 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................185


18.1
18.2

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 185


GENERAL....................................................................................................... 185
18.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 185
18.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 187
18.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 188
18.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 190
18.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 190
18.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 190

19 ALFOPLUS 18 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................191


19.1
19.2

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 191


GENERAL....................................................................................................... 191
19.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 191
19.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 195

MN.00273.E - 004

19.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 195


19.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 199
19.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 199
19.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 199
20 ALFOPLUS 23 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................200
20.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 200

20.2

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 200
20.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 200
20.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 206
20.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 207
20.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 210
20.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 210
20.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 211

21 ALFOPLUS 38 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................212


21.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 212

21.2

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 212
21.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 212
21.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 214
21.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 215
21.2.4 Radio flange ......................................................................................... 217
21.2.5 Power supply and consumption ............................................................... 217
21.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 217

Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES

219

22 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................219


23 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................223
24 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................227

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 1.
USER GUIDE

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

SIAE MICROELETTRONICA
Via Buonarroti, 21 - Cologno (MI) - Italy
DECLARES
THAT THE PRODUCTS

Digital Radio Relay System ALFOplus


comply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the
R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC)
and therefore are marked:
The following standards have been applied:
IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interface
EN 301 489-4 for EMC
EN 60950 for operator safety
EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio
EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply
EN 300 019 climatic characteristics (in operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storing: class 1.2; transport: class
2.3)
The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirements
of the R&TTE Directive (article 12) and the relevant decision of the EC, in term of classification of Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and associated identifiers, the ALFO shall carry the 'class 2' identifier:
Cologno Monzese, 17/03/2008

MN.00273.E - 004

On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA


Chairman and Executive Officer
Alberto Mascetti

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY


RULES

2.1

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.

2.1.1

Artificial respiration

It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.

2.1.2

Treatment of burns

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning

Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

Apply dry gauze on the burns

Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration


Step

Description

Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.).

Figure

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patients head and one under his neck.
2

Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far


as possible.

Shift the hand from the patients neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
3

While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open

With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities

While performing these operations observe if the patients


chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patients nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of


twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.

MN.00273.E - 004

2.2

SAFETY RULES

When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous
for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.

Fig.4 - Laser indication

10

MN.00273.E - 004

2.3

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &


ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

MN.00273.E - 004

11

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

3.1

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual consists in providing for the user information which permit to operate and
maintain the ALFOplus radio equipment.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/WebLCT management program
windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as helpon line.

3.2

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:

a basic understanding of microwave transmission

installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.

3.3

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.

Section 1 User Guide


It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.

Section 2 Description and specifications


It describes a general overview of the typical applications and in particular of the whole radio equipment.

Section 3 Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

12

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 4 LineUp
Lineup procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.

Section 5 Maintenance
The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the
faulty unit and to reestablish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.

Section 6 Programming and supervision


The ALFOplus radio is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and
indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 7 Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.

Section 8 Addendum
ALFOplus technical radio specifications, available for each frequency, are described in this section.

Section 9 Indexes and services


Lists of figures, list of tables and assistance service are shown in this section.

MN.00273.E - 004

13

14

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION

LIST OF ACRONYMS

4.1

LIST OF ACRONYMS

What follows is a list of acronyms used in this handbook:


-

ACM

Adaptive Code Modulation

AGC

Automatic Gain Control

ATPC

Automatic Transmitted Power Control

BBP

Base Band Processor

BER

Bit Error Rate

CBS

Committed Burst Size

CF

Coupling Flag

CIR

Committed Information Rate

CoS

Class of Service

CVID

Customer VLAN Identifier

DSCP

Differentiated Serviced Code Point

EBS

Excess Burst Size

EIR

Excess Information Rate

ELP

Ethernet Line Protection

EVC

Ethernet Virtual Connection

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate-Array

IP ToS

Type of Service IP

LACP

Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link Trunk

LAN

Local Area Network

MN.00273.E - 004

15

16

LLF

Link Loss Forwarding

LNA

Low Noise Amplifier

MAC

Media Access Control

MDI

Medium Dependent Interface

MDX

Medium Dependent Interface Crossover

MEF

Metro Ethernet Forum

NE

Network Element

OAM

Operation Administration and Maintenance

ODU

Outdoor Unit

PLL

Phase Locked Loop

POE

Power Over Ethernet

PToS

Priority Type of Service

QAM

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

RED

Random Early Drop

RF

Radio Frequency

RSSI

Received Signal Strength Indicator

RX

Direction from antenna to user

SCT

Subnetwork Craft Terminal

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

SVID

Service VLAN Identifier

TX

Direction from user to antenna

UNI

User Network Interface

VCO

Voltage Controlled Oscillator

VID

Virtual Lan Identifier

VLAN

Virtual LAN

WEBLCT

WEB Local Craft Terminal

WRR

Weighted Round Robin

MN.00273.E - 004

SYSTEM PRESENTATION

5.1

GENERAL

ALFOplus is a full-outdoor and full IP digital radio system for point-to-point applications, used for high capacity Ethernet transport (1 Gbps). The frequency range is from 6 GHz up to 42 GHz with hitless adaptive
code modulation (from 4QAM up to 1024QAM).
There are two available versions for ALFOplus: Gigabit Electrical (GE) and Gigabit Optical (GO). This document provides a general overview of ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) radio equipment.

5.2

APPLICATIONS

ALFOplus is the ideal solution in urban environments for all carrier-class applications in which the typical
requirements are Ethernet connections:

full IP radio, providing the foundation for a leading edge network

fully integrable with 3G, 4G, LTE nodes and backhaul

ideal for a fast and flexible evolution towards full IP network

complementary solutions for fibre deploy

last mile fibre extension for business customers

ISP high capacity and performance, for LAN-to-LAN connections

emergency wireless links

zero footprint applications

ALFOplus doesnt need any indoor unit; power supply can be directly by POE+ through the data cable or
through a dedicated auxiliary port. Its available 1+0 or 1+1 radio system configurable via software following two versions of ALFOplus:

Electrical Gigabit Version


-

LAN1 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT traffic and/or supervision port with clock, synchronism recovery
and PoE

LAN2 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock and synchronism recovery

Optical Gigabit Version


-

LAN1 - 1x100/1000BaseX traffic and/or supervision port with clock and synchronism recovery

LAN2 - 1x100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock, synchronism recovery and
PoE

depending on software configuration made for each port LAN1 and LAN2.

MN.00273.E - 004

17

5.2.1

Functionality

SIAE ALFOplus radio system presents the same functionalities of a switch (Layer 2).
ALFOplus radio system is able to forward Virtual LAN in transparent way or to manage incoming traffic filtering it or tagging it or dividing it in different VLAN. Traffic Flow control and Traffic priority capabilities can
be enabled or disabled via LAN software.
ALFOplus Ethernet switch functionality:

MAC switching, Learning and Ageing

Jumbo Frame up to 10 kbytes

MEF 10.2 bandwidth profiles for Ethernet Services

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN/IEEE VLAN stacking QinQ and VLAN rewriting

LLF (Link Loss Forwarding)

IEEE 802.3x Flow control

Flexible QoS based on VLAN (IEEE 802.1p), MPLS Exp BIT, ToS/DSCP (IPV4 or IPV6) per Port,
802.1p rewrite with MPLS

Queue Packet with Drop Policy: Tail Drop, Queue Drop, Red, Wred/Strict, WFQ, Mixed

Ethernet Frame Fragmentation

Advanced multi-layer 1/2/3/4 header Ethernet compressor algorithm

IEEE 802.1d STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)

IEEE 802.1v RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)

IEEE 802.1ag OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)/ITU-T y.1731/IEEE 802.3 ah

IEEE 802.3ad LACP - Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Trunking Line or Link Aggregation

IEEE 802.3af PoE - Power over Ethernet

Complete Synchronisation Management IEEE 1588 v2 precision time protocol and SSM G8264
(quality SyncE)

ELP (Ethernet Line Protection)

ITU G.8032 v2 Ethernet Ring Protection

Advanced Statistics Monitoring Based VLAN and Priority

Ethernet performance monitoring - RMon

5.3

PROGRAMMABILITY

ALFOplus radio system is managed by a microprocessor that makes it totally programmable via software
to perform the following functions:

radio link management


-

capacity and modulation

Link ID

Tx frequency and power

ATPC (Automatic Transmission Power Control)

main management
-

18

IP port configurable and supervisioning

With dispensation to maximum power

MN.00273.E - 004

routing table

remote element list

alarm severity configuration (modify alarm)

user manager (password, user, SNMP login)

operation and maintenance


-

permanent Tx Off

Rx signal threshold alarm

performance monitoring (G.828, Rx PWR, Tx PWR, ACM) with alarm threshold

S/N measure

LAN summary, statistic basis on port, VLAN or Priority

back-up/restore configuration

software update

report&logger maintenance (inventory, fault, commands)

SNTP alignment

manual operations (depends on timeout)


-

Tx transmitter OFF

force switch synch

radio BER test

radio loop

Ethernet switch management and functionalities

synchronisation

More links can be managed by LAN access (see Fig.7).

MN.00273.E - 004

19

157 mm

254 mm

254 mm
Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view

20

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network

MN.00273.E - 004

21

ALFO
plus

payload (VLANx) +
manag. (VLANy)

ALFO
plus

Inband management (with VLAN)

manag. 2

ALFO
plus

Outband management (without VLAN)

payload 1

payload +
manag.

Inband management (without VLAN)

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

payload +
manag.

payload +
manag.

payload +
manag.

payload +
manag.

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

Switch

Switch
Fig.8 - In-band management

payload +
manag.

ALFO
plus

ALFO
plus

management only

payload +
manag.
management only

IP1

IP1

IP2

IP2
Fig.9 - Drop node

payload

1
2

management only

ALFO 1
plus 2
X

ALFO
plus
X

MNGT

payload

management only

MNGT
Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only)

22

MN.00273.E - 004

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

For more details, refer to Section 8. ADDENDUM.

6.1

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD

The equipment complies with the following international standard:


-

EMC

EN 301 489-4

RF channel arrangement

see Tab.2
Tab.2 - Go-return frequency

Frequency band
(GHz)

Duplex Spacing

Channel number

Subbands

6L

ITU-R F.383-8 and CEPT REC 14-01E - 252.04 MHz

3CH @ 29.65MHz

6U

ITU-R F.384-10 - 340 MHz

3CH @ 40MHz

7.1 - 7.4

ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 196 MHz

3CH @ 28MHz

7.1 - 7.4

ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.1 - 7.4

CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.1 - 7.4

168 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.4 - 7.7

ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.4 - 7.7

CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.4 - 7.7

ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 168 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.4 - 7.9

ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 4 - 245 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.7 - 8.2

ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6 - 311.32 MHz

4CH @ 29.65MHz

7.9 - 8.5

CEPT ECC REC(02)06 310 MHz

3CH @ 28MHz

8.2 - 8.5

ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 - 119/126 MHz

2CH @ 28MHz

7.9 - 8.4

ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 3 - 266 MHz

3CH @ 28MHz

11

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - 490/530 MHz

4CH @ 40MHz

13

ITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E - 266MHz

3CH @ 28MHz

15

ITU-R F636 - 420 MHz

4CH @ 28MHz

15

ITU-R F636 - 490 MHz

4CH @ 28MHz

15

ITU-R F636 - 644 MHz

4CH @ 28MHz

15

CEPT T/R 12-07 - 728 MHz

4CH @ 28MHz

MN.00273.E - 004

23

24

15

CEPT - 315 MHz

3CH @ 28MHz

15

CEPT - 322 MHz

3CH @ 28MHz

17

SRD ERC REC 70-03 (unlicensed)

12CH @ 28 MHz

18

ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - 1560 MHz

15CH @ 27.5MHz

23

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz

11CH @ 28MHz

23

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - 1200 MHz

11CH @ 28MHz

23

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex1 - 1232 MHz

11CH @ 28MHz

26

ITU-R F.748 - Annex 1 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz

16CH @ 28MHz

32

ITU-R F.1520 and CEPT Rec (01)02 - 812 MHz

10CH @ 28MHz

38

ITU-R F.749 and CEPT Rec T/R 12-01 - 1260 MHz

20CH @ 28MHz

42

ECC Rec (01)04 - 1500 MHz

18CH @ 28MHz (520 MHz)

Digital fixed point to point

EN 301 128

Climatic characteristics

EN 300 019 (class 4.1 for ODU;


storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)

Safety

EN60950

MN.00273.E - 004

6.2

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

Tx power

see Tab.3

Tolerance

2dB
Tab.3 - Tx power

ALFOplus series

Nominal output power (dBm)

Frequency Band
(GHz)

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

256LQAM

512QAM

1KQAM

28

28

25

25

24

24

24

24

24

24

23

28

28

25

25

24

24

24

24

24

24

23

28

28

25

25

24

24

24

24

24

24

23

10.5

28

28

25

25

24

24

24

24

24

24

23

11

27

27

24

24

23

23

23

23

23

23

22

13

27

27

24

24

23

23

23

23

23

23

22

15

27

27

24

24

23

23

23

23

23

23

22

17

22

22

20

20

18

18

18

18

18

18

17

18

23

23

21

21

19

19

19

19

19

19

18

23

23

23

21

21

19

19

19

19

19

19

18

26

22

22

20

20

18

18

18

18

18

18

17

28

21

21

19

19

17

17

17

17

17

17

16

32

20

20

18

18

16

16

16

16

16

16

15

38

19

19

17

17

15

15

15

15

15

15

14

42

17

17

15

15

13

13

13

13

13

13

12

RF output attenuation

up to 20 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable

Automatic transmit power control (ATPC range

20 dB, implemented in 1dB step

Remote transmit power control (RTPC range

20 dB, implemented

Transmitter return loss

GB8000 15 dB
GB9000 6 dB

Stability in frequency

5ppm, 10ppm (including ageing)

Muting

60dB, related to maximum transmitted power

Receiver threshold with BER = 10-3

see Tab.4

MN.00273.E - 004

25

Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled)


Radio Nominal RSL
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-95.5

-93.0

-89.5

-86.5

-84.5

-82.0

-78.5

-76.0

-73.0

-69.5

BER=10-10

-93.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

BER=10

-94.5

-91.5

-88.0

-85.0

-83.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.5

-71.5

-67.5

BER=10-10

-92.5

-89.5

-86.0

-83.0

-81.0

-78.5

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-65.5

BER=10-6

-94.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-66.5

BER=10-10

-6

10

14

28

30

56
6 GHz

Physical Mode

-92.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

-6

-91.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-80.0

-77.0

-74.0

-70.5

-68.0

-64.0

-10

BER=10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-78.0

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-6

BER=10

-91.0

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.5

-76.5

-73.5

-70.0

-67.5

-63.5

-10

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

-6

BER=10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-60.5

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-58.5

BER=10

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-93.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

BER=10-10

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10

-92.5

-89.5

-86.0

-83.0

-81.0

-78.5

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-65.5

BER=10-10

-90.5

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.0

-76.5

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-6

-92.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-6

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-78.0

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-58.5

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

-6

10

14

28

-10

-6

30

56

26

Physical Mode

-10

BER=10

MN.00273.E - 004

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

14

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-95.5

-93.0

-89.5

-86.5

-84.5

-82.0

-78.5

-76.0

-73.0

-69.5

BER=10

-93.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

BER=10-6

-94.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-66.5

BER=10-10

-92.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10

-91.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-80.0

-77.0

-74.0

-70.5

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-78.0

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-6

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-60.5

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-58.5

BER=10-6
-10

-6

28

56
7 GHz

Physical Mode

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-93.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

BER=10-10

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10

-92.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-6

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-78.0

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-58.5

BER=10-10

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

-6

14

28

56

Physical Mode

-10

MN.00273.E - 004

27

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-95.0

-92.5

-89.0

-86.0

-84.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.0

BER=10

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

BER=10-6

-94.0

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.0

BER=10-10

-92.0

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.0

BER=10

-94.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.0

BER=10-10

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-6

-91.0

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.5

-76.5

-73.5

-70.0

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

28

30

40

56
11
GHz

Physical Mode

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

-6

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-79.0

-76.0

-73.0

-69.5

-67.0

-63.0

-10

BER=10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-6

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

-66.0

-61.5

BER=10

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-59.5

BER=10-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.0

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10

-10

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-10

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10

-92.0

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.0

BER=10-10

-90.0

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.0

BER=10-6

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-59.5

BER=10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

-6

10

14

28

-10

-6

30

40

56

28

Physical Mode

-10

MN.00273.E - 004

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

14

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-95.0

-92.5

-89.0

-86.0

-84.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.0

BER=10

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-6

-94.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.0

BER=10-10

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10

-91.0

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.5

-76.5

-73.5

-70.0

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.0

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-6
-10

-6

28

56
13
GHz

Physical Mode

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-10

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

-6

14

28

56

Physical Mode

-10

MN.00273.E - 004

29

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

14

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-95.0

-92.5

-89.0

-86.0

-84.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.0

BER=10

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-6

-94.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.0

BER=10-10

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10

-91.0

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.5

-76.5

-73.5

-70.0

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.0

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-6
-10

-6

28

56
15
GHz

Physical Mode

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-10

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

-6

14

28

56

30

Physical Mode

-10

MN.00273.E - 004

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

14

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-93.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

BER=10

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10-6

-92.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-78.0

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-58.5

BER=10-10

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10-6
-10

-6

28

56
17
GHz

Physical Mode

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

BER=10

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

76.0

72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-76.5

-74.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10-6

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10-10

-82.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-70.5

-68.0

-65.0

-61.5

-59.0

-54.4

-6

14

28

56

Physical Mode

-10

MN.00273.E - 004

31

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-94.5

-92.0

-88.5

-85.5

-83.5

-81.0

-77.5

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

BER=10

-92.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

-79.0

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

BER=10-6

-93.5

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-66.5

BER=10-10

-91.5

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10

-93.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-65.5

BER=10-10

-91.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-6

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

30

40

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

-6

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-79.0

-76.0

-73.0

-69.5

-67.0

-63.0

-10

BER=10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-6

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.5

-75.5

-72.5

-69.0

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.0

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.0

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.0

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-59.5

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

BER=10

-10

-6

50

56
18
GHz

Physical Mode

-10

BER=10

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-92.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

-79.0

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

BER=10

-90.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

BER=10-6

-91.5

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10

-91.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-6

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.0

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-6

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-89.0

BER=10

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.0

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

-10

-6

30

40

50

56

32

Physical Mode

-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

-6

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

-10

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

BER=10
BER=10

MN.00273.E - 004

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-94.5

-92.0

-88.5

-85.5

-83.5

-81.0

-77.5

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

BER=10

-92.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

-79.0

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

BER=10-6

-93.5

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-66.5

BER=10-10

-91.5

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10

-93.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-65.5

BER=10-10

-91.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-6

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

30

40

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

-6

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-79.0

-76.0

-73.0

-69.5

-67.0

-63.0

-10

BER=10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-6

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.5

-75.5

-72.5

-69.0

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.0

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.0

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.0

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-59.5

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

BER=10

-10

-6

50

56
23
GHz

Physical Mode

-10

BER=10

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-92.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

-79.0

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

BER=10

-90.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

BER=10-6

-91.5

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10

-91.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-6

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.0

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-6

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-89.0

BER=10

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.0

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

-10

-6

30

40

50

56

Physical Mode

-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

-6

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

-10

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

BER=10
BER=10

MN.00273.E - 004

33

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

14

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10-6

-92.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

BER=10-6
-10

-6

28

56
26
GHz

Physical Mode

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10-10

-89.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

BER=10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.0

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.5

BER=10-6

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

BER=10-10

-82.0

-78.5

-75.0

-72.0

-70.0

-67.5

-64.5

-61.0

-58.5

-54.0

-6

14

28

56

34

Physical Mode

-10

MN.00273.E - 004

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

14

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-93.5

-91.0

-87.5

-84.5

-82.5

-80.0

-76.5

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

BER=10

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10-6

-92.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-78.0

-75.0

-72.0

-68.5

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-58.5

BER=10-10

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10-6
-10

-6

28

56
28
GHz

Physical Mode

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

BER=10

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-76.5

-74.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10-6

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10-10

-82.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-70.5

-68.0

-65.0

-61.5

-59.0

-54.5

-6

14

28

56

Physical Mode

-10

MN.00273.E - 004

35

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-92.0

-89.5

-86.0

-83.0

-81.0

-78.5

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

BER=10

-90.0

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.0

-76.5

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

BER=10-6

-91.0

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-89.0

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10

-91.0

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.0

-76.5

-73.0

-70.0

-67.0

-63.0

BER=10-10

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.0

-74.5

-71.0

-68.0

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-6

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

30

40

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.5

-59.5

-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

-10

BER=10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10-6

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-58.5

BER=10-10

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

BER=10-10

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

BER=10-6

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.0

-83.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.0

-71.0

-68.5

-65.5

-62.0

-59.5

-55.0

BER=10

-10

-6

50

56
32
GHz

Physical Mode

-10

BER=10

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-90.0

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-79.0

-76.5

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

BER=10

-88.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.0

-74.5

-71.0

-68.5

-65.5

-62.0

BER=10-6

-89.0

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

-87.0

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.0

-69.5

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.0

-74.5

-71.0

-68.0

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

-72.5

-69.0

-66.0

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.5

-69.5

-66.5

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-67.5

-64.5

-61.5

-57.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.5

BER=10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10-10

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-56.0

BER=10-6

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10

-82.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-70.5

-68.0

-65.0

-61.5

-59.0

-54.5

BER=10-6

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

-10

-6

30

40

50

56

36

Physical Mode

-10

-81.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-69.5

-67.0

-64.0

-60.5

-58.0

-53.5

-6

-83.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.0

-71.0

-68.5

-65.5

-62.0

-59.5

-55.0

-10

-81.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-69.0

-66.5

-63.5

-60.0

-57.5

-53.0

BER=10
BER=10

MN.00273.E - 004

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-92.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

-79.0

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

BER=10

-90.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

BER=10-6

-91.5

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10

-91.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-6

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

30

40

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.0

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

-6

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

-10

BER=10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-6

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.0

BER=10-10

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.0

BER=10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

BER=10-6

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

BER=10

-10

-6

50

56
38
GHz

Physical Mode

-10

BER=10

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

10

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-90.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

-77.5

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

BER=10

-88.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

BER=10-6

-89.5

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

-75.5

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-10

-87.5

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.0

-67.5

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10

-89.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

-73.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

-73.5

-70.0

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

-71.5

-68.0

-65.0

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10-6

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-10

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-73.0

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-57.0

BER=10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.5

BER=10-6

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.0

BER=10

-83.0

-79.5

-76.0

-73.0

-71.0

-68.5

-65.5

-62.0

-59.5

-55.0

BER=10-6

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

BER=10-10

BER=10-6
-10

-6

14

20

28

-10

-6

30

40

50

56

Physical Mode

-10

-82.0

-78.5

-75.0

-72.0

-70.0

-67.5

-64.5

-61.0

-58.5

-54.0

-6

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

-10

-81.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-69.5

-67.0

-64.0

-60.5

-58.0

-53.5

BER=10
BER=10

MN.00273.E - 004

37

Radio Nominal RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10

-89.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

BER=10-6

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-76.5

-74.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10-6

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10-10

-82.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-70.5

-68.0

-65.0

-61.5

-59.0

-54.5

BER=10-6

-10

14

-6

28

56
42
GHz

Physical Mode

Radio Guaranteed RSL


Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
7

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1KQAM

BER=10-6

-89.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

-76.0

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

BER=10-10

-87.5

-85.0

-81.5

78.5

76.5

-74.0

-70.5

-68.0

-65.0

-61.5

BER=10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-76.5

-74.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-74.5

-72.0

-68.5

-65.5

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-6

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-56.0

BER=10-6

-82.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-70.5

-68.0

-65.0

-61.5

-59.0

54.5

BER=10-10

-80.5

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-68.5

-66.0

-63.0

-59.5

-57.0

-52.5

-6

14

28

-10

56

Physical Mode

Modulation

4QAM up to 1024QAM

Number of settable RF channel

depending on RF band and capacity

Tuning frequency step

250 KHz

Tx/Rx frequency spacing

see Tab.3

Noise figure

see Tab.5
Tab.5 - Noise figure

38

Frequency Band (GHz)

Noise Figure (dB)

11

6.5

13

6.5

15

6.5

17

18

23

26

8.5

MN.00273.E - 004

Frequency Band (GHz)

Noise Figure (dB)

28

32

9.5

38

42

10

Link ID

identifier RFOH: 1 to 255

Loop facility

Baseband loop, RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)

Spurious emissions/rejection

according to ETSI

Max RSL threshold


-

without degradation

-25dBm

without distortion

-22dBm

without permanent damage

-10dBm

6.2.1

Adaptive modulation

ALFOplus ODUs implement an error free adaptive modulation algorithm to improve the system gain when
the quality of the received signal become insufficient to guarantee an error free link.
The thresholds for ACM are shown in the Tab.6.
Tab.6 - ACM switching thresholds
7M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

4SQAM

6.4

4QAM

8.2

11.2

17.7

20.2

5.0

16SQAM

-2.5

12.7

15.7

19.6

19.6

7.5

16QAM

-2.5

14.6

17.6

22.2

23.5

5.0

32QAM

-3.75

17.2

20.2

24.7

24.5

6.3

64QAM

-3.5

19.7

22.7

27.8

27.8

4.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.8

25.8

31

31.6

5.0

256QAM

-4.125

26

29

34.1

34.1

5.6

512QAM

-4.25

29.1

32.1

36.8

36.8

5.1

1KQAM

-4.25

32.3

35.3

10M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

Up-shift
(Estim.)

4SQAM

6.4

13.2

13.2

4QAM

8.2

11.2

17.7

20.2

5.0

16SQAM

-2.5

12.7

15.7

19.6

19.6

7.5

16QAM

-2.5

14.6

17.6

22.2

23.54

5.0

32QAM

-3.75

17.2

20.2

24.7

24.5

6.3

MN.00273.E - 004

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

13.2

Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

13.2

4.5

4.5
Margin
(Estim.)

39

64QAM

-3.5

19.7

22.7

27.8

27.8

4.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.8

25.8

31

31.6

5.0

256QAM

-4.125

26

29

34.1

34.1

5.6

512QAM

-4.25

29.1

32.1

36.8

36.8

5.1

1KQAM

-4.25

32.3

35.3

4.5

14M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

4SQAM

5.8

4QAM

8.2

11.2

17.6

5.0

20.1

5.0

16SQAM

-2.5

12.6

15.6

19.5

5.0

19.5

7.5

16QAM

-2.5

14.5

17.5

22

5.0

23.3

5.0

32QAM

-3.75

17

20

25.7

5.0

25.5

6.3

64QAM

-3.5

19.7

23.2

27.7

6.0

27.7

5.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.7

25.7

30.8

5.0

31.4

5.0

256QAM

-4.125

25.8

28.8

33.9

5.0

33.9

5.6

512QAM

-4.25

28.9

31.9

36.7

5.0

36.7

5.1

1KQAM

-4.25

32.2

35.2

20M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

4SQAM

5.7

4QAM

8.2

10.7

2.5

17.1

4.5

19.6

4.5

16SQAM

-2.5

12.6

15.1

2.5

18.9

4.5

18.9

7.0

16QAM

-2.5

14.4

16.9

2.5

21.3

4.5

22.6

4.5

32QAM

-3.75

16.8

19.3

2.5

25.6

4.5

25.4

5.8

64QAM

-3.5

19.6

23.1

3,5

27.2

27.2

5.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.7

25.2

2.5

30.2

4.5

30.8

4.5

256QAM

-4.125

25.7

28.2

2.5

33.3

4.5

33.3

5.1

512QAM

-4.25

28.8

31.3

2.5

36.5

4.5

36.5

4.6

1KQAM

-4.25

320

34.5

2.5

28M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

4SQAM

5.7

4QAM

8.2

10.7

2.5

17.1

4.5

19.6

4.5

16SQAM

-2.5

12.6

15.1

2.5

18.9

4.5

18.9

7.0

16QAM

-2.5

14.4

16.9

2.5

21.3

4.5

22.6

4.5

32QAM

-3.75

16.8

19.3

2.5

25.6

4.5

25.4

5.8

64QAM

-3.5

19.6

23.1

3,5

27.2

6.0

27.2

5.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.7

25.2

2.5

30.2

4.5

30.8

4.5

256QAM

-4.125

25.7

28.2

2.5

33.3

4.5

33.3

5.1

40

13.2

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)
13.2

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

MN.00273.E - 004

512QAM

-4.25

28.8

31.3

2.5

1KQAM

-4.25

32

34.5

2.5

30M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

4SQAM

5.7

4QAM

8.2

10.7

2.5

17.1

4.5

19.6

4.5

16SQAM

-2.5

12.6

15.1

2.5

18.9

4.5

18.9

7.0

16QAM

-2.5

14.4

16.9

2.5

21.3

4.5

22.6

4.5

32QAM

-3.75

16.8

19.3

2.5

25.6

4.5

25.4

5.8

64QAM

-3.5

19.6

23.1

3,5

27.2

6.0

27.2

5.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.7

25.2

2.5

30.2

4.5

30.8

4.5

256QAM

-4.125

25.7

28.2

2.5

33.3

4.5

33.3

5.1

512QAM

-4.25

28.8

31.3

2.5

36.5

4.5

36.5

4.6

1KQAM

-4.25

32

34.5

2.5

40M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

4SQAM

5.7

4QAM

8.2

10.7

2.5

17.1

4.5

19.6

4.5

16SQAM

-2.5

12.6

15.1

2.5

18.9

4.5

18.9

7.0

16QAM

-2.5

14.4

16.9

2.5

21.3

4.5

22.6

4.5

32QAM

-3.75

16.8

19.3

2.5

24.6

4.5

24.4

5.8

64QAM

-3.5

19.6

22.6

3.0

27.2

5.0

27.2

4.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.7

25.2

2.5

30.2

4.5

30.8

4.5

256QAM

-4.125

25.7

28.2

2.5

33.3

4.5

33.3

5.1

512QAM

-4.25

28.8

31.3

2.5

36.5

4.5

36.5

4.6

1KQAM

-4.25

32

34.5

2.5

50M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

4SQAM

5.7

4QAM

8.2

10.7

2.5

17.1

4.5

19.6

4.5

16SQAM

-2.5

12.6

15.1

2.5

18.9

4.5

18.9

7.0

16QAM

-2.5

14.4

16.9

2.5

21.3

4.5

22.6

4.5

32QAM

-3.75

16.8

19.3

2.5

24.6

4.5

24.4

5.8

64QAM

-3.5

19.6

22.6

3.0

27.2

5.0

27.2

4.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.7

25.2

2.5

30.2

4.5

30.8

4.5

256QAM

-4.125

25.7

28.2

2.5

33.3

4.5

33.3

5.1

512QAM

-4.25

28.8

31.3

2.5

36.5

4.5

36.5

4.6

1KQAM

-4.25

32

34.5

2.5

MN.00273.E - 004

36.5

4.5

36.5

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

4.6

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5
Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5

4.5

41

56M Physical Mode

Power
(Estim.)

BER 10-6
(Estim.)

4SQAM

5.7

4QAM

8.2

10.7

2.5

17.1

4.5

19.6

4.5

16SQAM

-2.5

12.6

15.1

2.5

18.9

4.5

18.9

7.0

16QAM

-2.5

14.4

16.9

2.5

21.3

4.5

22.6

4.5

32QAM

-3.75

16.8

19.3

2.5

24.6

4.5

24.4

5.8

64QAM

-3.5

19.6

22.6

27.2

5.0

27.2

4.8

128QAM

-3.5

22.7

25.2

2.5

30.2

4.5

30.8

4.5

256QAM

-4.125

25.7

28.2

2.5

33.3

4.5

33.3

5.1

512QAM

-4.125

28.8

31.3

2.5

36.5

4.5

36.5

4.6

1KQAM

-5.0

32

34.5

2.5

6.3

Down-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

Up-shift
(Estim.)

Margin
(Estim.)

12.7

4.5

4.5

LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS

Ethernet interface
All ports can be transmitters or sources of the synchronism through Synchronous Ethernet.

42

Ethernet connectors

IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45


IEEE 802.3 100/1000BaseX LC

Ethernet switch functionality

MAC Switching, Learning and Ageing


Jumbo frame up to 10 kbytes
IEEE 802.3af PoE-Power Over Ethernet
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ad QinQ-VLAN Stacking
VLAN rewriting (Radio side)
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF)
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS/DSCP
IEEE 802.1w RSTP-Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
ELP (Ethernet Line Protection)
IEEE 802.3ad LACP-Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link
Aggregation
IEEE 802.1ag OAM-Operation, Administration and Maintenance
G.8264 SyncE Quality Management (SSM)
Hard limiting or WRED (Software selectable)
Enhanced Ethernet Prioritization based on MPLS ExpBits
Ethernet frame fragmentation (radio side)
Selective QinQ based on VLAN and 802.1p priority
CIR/EIR rate Management, based on outer Tag or input priority
(radio side)
Multi Layer Packet Compression (up to 128kbytes-configurable
radio side)
Advanced statistics monitoring based on VLAN and priority
Ethernet performance monitoring-RMON
Security management (SSH, SFTP) on network element and
NMS5UX

Ethernet latency

see Tab.7

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.7 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus


One way delay (msec)

Packet size 64 bytes

Channel size (MHz)

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

1.100

1.083

1.069

1.064

1.060

1.056

1.054

1.051

1.049

10

0.925

0.914

0.904

0.900

0.897

0.894

0.893

0.980

0.889

14

0.649

0.641

0.634

0.632

0.629

0.627

0.626

0.625

0.624

20

0.464

0.459

0.453

0.451

0.450

0.449

0.448

0.447

0.447

28

0.329

0.325

0.321

0.320

0.319

0.318

0.318

0.317

0316

30

0.311

0.306

0.304

0.303

0.302

0.302

0.300

0.300

0.299

40

0.237

0.233

0.232

0.231

0.230

0.230

0.229

0.229

0.228

50

0.193

0.190

0.188

0.188

0.186

0.186

0.186

0.186

0.186

56

0.170

0.168

0.166

0.166

0.165

0.164

0.164

0.164

0.163

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 128 bytes

Channel size (MHz)

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

1.148

1.120

1.095

1.088

1.078

1.071

1.068

1.063

1.060

10

0.960

0.940

0.922

0.916

0.909

0.905

0.903

0.900

0.898

14

0.674

0.660

0.648

0.644

0.639

0.636

0.634

0.632

0.630

20

0.483

0.473

0.464

0.461

0.458

0.456

0.455

0.453

0.451

28

0.342

0.335

0.329

0.327

0.324

0.323

0.322

0.321

0.321

30

0.323

0.293

0.289

0.283

0.285

0.283

0.282

0.282

0.303

40

0.266

0.241

0.238

0.233

0.235

0.233

0.232

0.232

0.231

50

0.201

0.197

0.193

0.192

0.191

0.190

0.190

0.189

0.188

56

0.177

0.174

0.171

0.169

0.169

0.168

0.167

0.167

0.167

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 256 bytes

Channel size (MHz)

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

1.247

1.194

1.146

1.132

1.114

1.101

1.095

1.087

1.081

10

1.030

0.993

0.960

0.950

0.937

0.929

0.925

0.919

0.913

14

0.723

0.697

0.674

0.666

0.658

0.652

0.649

0.645

0.641

20

0.517

0.499

0.482

0.478

0.472

0.467

0.466

0.463

0.456

28

0.367

0.354

0.342

0.339

0.335

0.332

0.331

0.329

0.327

30

0.347

0.330

0.324

0.321

0.317

0.313

0.303

0.310

0.309

40

0.266

0.253

0.248

0.246

0.243

0.240

0.232

0.238

0.237

50

0.216

0.209

0.203

0.200

0.198

0.196

0.196

0.195

0.193

56

0.191

0.185

0.179

0.177

0.175

0.173

0.172

0.172

0.171

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 512 bytes

Channel size (MHz)

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

1.438

1.338

1.247

1.218

1.185

1.163

1.151

1.133

1.124

MN.00273.E - 004

43

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 512 bytes

10

1.167

1.096

1.032

1.013

0.989

0.973

0.965

0.952

0.944

14

0.820

0.770

0.725

0.712

0.695

0.684

0.678

0.669

0.664

20

0.587

0.553

0.521

0.511

0.499

0.492

0.488

0.482

0.478

28

0.418

0.393

0.371

0.364

0.356

0.350

0.347

0.343

0.341

30

0.394

0.364

0.351

0.343

0.336

0.330

0.328

0.325

0.323

40

0.303

0.280

0.270

0.264

0.258

0.254

0.252

0.250

0.247

50

0.246

0.233

0.220

0.216

0.212

0.209

0.207

0.205

0.203

56

0.218

0.206

0.195

0.191

0.187

0.185

0.183

0.181

0.179

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 1024 bytes

Channel size (MHz)

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

1.824

1.628

1.450

1.395

1.329

1.284

1.261

1.228

1.208

10

1.443

1.305

1.181

1.143

1.096

1.065

1.049

1.026

1.007

14

1.014

0.917

0.830

0.803

0.770

0.748

0.737

0.721

0.711

20

0.726

0.658

0.597

0.579

0.556

0.540

0.532

0.521

0.513

28

0.519

0.470

0.426

0.414

0.397

0.386

0.380

0.372

0.368

30

0.489

0.432

0.405

0.392

0.377

0.368

0.360

0.363

0.348

40

0.376

0.332

0.311

0.301

0.290

0.283

0.277

0.279

0.269

50

0.307

0.280

0.256

0.248

0.239

0.233

0.229

0.225

0.221

56

0.272

0.248

0.227

0.220

0.212

0.206

0.203

0.200

0.197

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 1518 bytes

Channel size (MHz)

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

2.193

1.905

1.644

1.562

1.466

1.400

1.367

0.001

1.289

10

1.707

1.505

1.322

1.265

1.197

1.151

1.127

1.092

1.066

14

1.200

1.058

0.929

0.890

0.842

0.809

0.792

0.768

0.754

20

0.860

0.761

0.671

0.643

0.609

0.588

0.576

0.559

0.545

28

0.615

0.544

0.480

0.460

0.436

0.420

0.412

0.399

0.393

30

0.580

0.499

0.460

0.441

0.419

0.403

0.393

0.385

0.372

40

0.433

0.381

0.351

0.337

0.320

0.308

0.300

0.294

0.289

50

0.365

0.325

0.288

0.277

0.264

0.255

0.250

0.246

0.239

56

0.324

0.289

0.257

0.247

0.235

0.227

0.223

0.219

0.214

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 10000 bytes

Channel size (MHz)

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

8.570

6.698

5.001

4.471

3.844

3.417

3.196

2.874

2.692

10

6.271

4.959

3.769

3.399

2.958

2.659

2.505

2.280

2.101

14

4.418

3.493

2.655

2.394

2.084

1.873

1.764

1.606

1.516

20

3.171

2.532

1.953

1.773

1.559

1.414

1.338

1.228

1.123

44

MN.00273.E - 004

One way delay (msec)

Packet size 10000 bytes

28

2.284

1.824

1.407

1.277

1.123

1.018

0.964

0.885

0.840

30

2.155

1.608

1.352

1.234

1.093

0.996

0.928

0.875

0.801

40

1.670

1.246

1.048

0.956

0.847

0.772

0.719

0.678

0.646

50

1.371

1.114

0.881

0.809

0.722

0.664

0.634

0.590

0.552

56

1.227

0.997

0.789

0.724

0.646

0.594

0.567

0.528

0.505

Guaranteed Ethernet throughput

see Tab.8

Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression
Radio Net Throughput (Mbps)
Channel spacing

4SQAM

4QAM

16SQAM

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1K QAM

7 MHz

9.295

10.872

16.225

21.080

24.483

30.293

36.102

41.912

47.763

53.572

10 MHz

11.408

15.328

22.875

29.720

34.517

42.707

50.898

29.088

67.279

75.469

14 MHz

16.393

22.025

32.870

42.705

49.599

61.368

73.137

84.906

96.756

108.529

20 MHz

23.231

31.213

46.581

60.520

70.289

86.968

103.647

120.326

137.004

153.683

28 MHz

32.956

44.279

66.081

85.854

99.713

123.373

147.034

170.694

194.524

218.185

30 MHz

35.117

47.183

70.414

91.484

106.251

131.463

156.675

181.887

207.100

232.312

40 MHz

46.462

62.426

93.163

121.040

140.578

173.936

207.294

240.651

274.009

307.366

50 MHz

58.078

78.033

116.454

151.300

175.723

217.420

259.117

300.814

342.511

384.208

56 MHz

65.912

88.558

132.161

171.708

199.425

246.746

294.068

341.389

389.048

436.369

MN.00273.E - 004

45

6.3.1

Ethernet optical interface characteristics

The optical interface can be specialized for the different applications by insertion of the proper transceiver
on the unit.
Tab.9 - Interface characteristics
Gigabit
Parameter

Single Mode

100 Mbit/s

Multi Mode

9/125 m

50/125 m

Multi Mode

62.5/125 m

50/125 m

62.5/125 m

Operating Distance

up to 10km

up to 550m

up to 2km

Optical Center Wavelength

1310 nm

850 nm

1310 nm

Optical Transmit Power

-3 -9.5 dBm

-2 -9.5 dBm

-14 -22 dBm

Receive Sensitivity

-19 dBm

-17 dBm

-29 dBm

Average Receive Power


Max

-3 dBm

0 dBm

-14 dBm

Link Power Budget

9.5 dB

7.5 dB

7 dB

Compliance

1000BaseLX
IEEE 802.3z

1000BaseSX
IEEE 802.3z

1000BaseFX IEEE 802.3z


100BaseFx IEEE 802.3z

Transceiver Type

Pluggable

Connectors Type

LC

6.4

POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE

ALFOplus unit is compatible with standard POE + IEEE 802.at (with exceeding maximum power). Power
supply can be provided at the LAN1 (ALFOplus GE) or LAN2 (ALFOplus GO).
In case of external PoE injector, verify that it has overcurrent protection. Power supply can be provided at
the LAN interface or at an auxiliary separated connector at the same time. The maximum length of CAT5e
cable (that carries data+PoE) is 100m.
-

Operating voltage range


Power consumption

48Vdc 15%

see Tab.10
Tab.10 - Power consumption (W)
Power consumption (W)

46

Frequency band

Typical

Guaranteed

t.b.d.

t.b.d.

37

39

37

39

11

35

37

Power consumption with negligible cable length.

MN.00273.E - 004

Power consumption (W)


Frequency band

Typical

Guaranteed

13

37

39

15

37

39

17

37

39

18

33.5

35

23

33.5

35

26

t.b.d.

t.b.d.

32

t.b.d.

t.b.d.

38

34

36

42

t.b.d.

t.b.d.

In any case, for other different needs, a dedicated auxiliary port (5 pin connector) provides power supply
48Volt (see Fig.56). For installation, please use rugged and waterproof cable.

6.4.1

PoE injector
Tab.11 - PoE injector supported

6.4.1.1

Code

Description

S03653

AC/DC 60W PoE injector

S03654

DC/DC 75W PoE injector

PoE injector functionality

The equipment presented in this paragraph is a SIAE IDU that provides power to the ODU ALFOplus
through the LAN cable.
SIAE Passive PoE Injector is a complete power management hot-swap with alarm indicators (over-current
protection, excess-voltage and under-voltage lockout). The Ethernet traffic from DATA connector (input)
is overlaid with power supply 48Volt into DATA&Power connector (Output). Below the details:

MN.00273.E - 004

47

Fig.11 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector)

Fig.12 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector)

6.4.1.2

Code table
Tab.12 - Code Table

48

Description

Code

48 Vin 1 ports PoE injector

C60507

48Vin 4 ports PoE injector

C60506

MN.00273.E - 004

6.4.1.3

Electrical characteristics
Tab.13 - Electrical characteristics

6.4.1.4

Vin

36..72Vdc (floating/pos. GND)

Iin (without ODU)

60mA (C60507), 120mA (C60506)

Alarm cable open on

Iout=50mA 20%

Alarm cable open off

Iout=70mA 20%

Iout MAX (per port)

1.45A 10%

Inrush current

ETS 300 132-2 mask compliant

Surge protection

IEC 1000-4-5 Level 4 4KV compliant

Connectors
Tab.14 - Connectors

6.4.1.5

Power supply

3 contacts plug P.3.81

ODU

RJ45

Default polarity RJ45

V+(4.5)

V-(7.8)

Optional polarity RJ45

V+(3.6)

V-(1.2)

Description of alarms
Tab.15 - Description of alarms
Alarm LED (yellow)

Power LED (green)

Meaning

On

On

Cable open

Off

On

Remote Power supply is OK

Blinking

Off

Cable short circuit

Fig.13 - PoE injector interface

MN.00273.E - 004

49

6.5

WAVEGUIDE FLANGE

Type

see Tab.16
Tab.16 - Type

Frequency band

Type

UDR 70

UBR 84

UBR 84

11

UBR 100

13

UDR 120

15

UDR 140

18

UBR 220

23

UBR 220

26

UBR 220

32

UBR 320

38

UBR 320

42

UBR 500

Maximum length

see.Tab.17
Tab.17 - Maximum length
Waveguide maximum length

50

Channel spacing

(m)

7 MHz

10

14 MHz

10

28 MHz

10

40 MHz

56 MHz

MN.00273.E - 004

6.6

MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Physical size of system components:


Tab.18 - ODU dimension

ALFOplus

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

256

256

114

Weight of system components:


-

ALFOplus

6.7

< 4.5 kg

SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Protection method:

Gas discharger technical characteristics

gas dischargers

DC spark-over voltage

150V +/-20%

Nominal impulse discharge


current (wave 8/20 s)

20kA

Single impulse discharge


current (wave 8/20 s)

25kA

Operation and storage temperature

-40C +90C

Performances

in accordance to EN 301 489

6.8

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Operating temperature range

33C +55C

Survival temperature range (reduce MTBF)

-40C +70C

Operational humidity
class

weatherproof according to IP65 environmental

Thermal resistance

thermal resistance 0.5C/W

Solar heat gain

not exceeding 5C

Wind resistance

150 km/h (in operation)


200 km/h (survival)

Solar shield on the ODU guarantees an additional protection against temperature increase.

MN.00273.E - 004

51

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

7.1

GENERAL

SIAE ALFOplus is a radio system for digital link in full outdoor mechanics.
ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) microwave radio system is available in various frequency ranges from
6 to 42 GHz.
The Outdoor Unit can be easily installed and configured owing to its:

reduced size

easily orientable antenna

broad operating temperature range

high flexibility of line interfaces selection

low consumption.

The first description given in the following first concerns the circuitry common to all the versions, then that
of the line interfaces will follow.

7.1.1

Block diagram

The ALFOplus consists of two PCB housed in a small size aluminium cabinet:

BBP-GE (Baseband processor Gigabit electrical)

TRx (IF and RF transceiver)

BBP-GO (Baseband processor Gigabit optical)

TRx (IF and RF transceiver)

or

The description that follows (see Fig.14 and Fig.15) details the block diagrams of electrical and optical version.

52

MN.00273.E - 004

MN.00273.E - 004
MII

SWD

RAM
SSD

Microcontroller

Surge protection,
magnetics,
Poe splitter

Surge protection
& magnetics

BBP: base band processor

Aux DC/DC

Main DC/DC,

Aux Pwr Supply

Ge LAN1

Ge LAN2

GMII

GMII

ADC
ADC

2xSync

RAM

FPGA

Vga

Vga

PWM

ADC

QSPI

CONN

Filter

Filter

ADC

PW

DA

DA

DEM

LO

Filter

Filter

TRX: IF and RF transceiver

Down converter,
Agc

MOD

LO

Fig.14 - ALFOplus GE

53

Fig.15 - ALFOplus GO

54

MN.00273.E - 004

MII

PHY

GMII
GMII

RAM
SSD

Microcontroller

SWD

BBP: base band processor

Main DC/DC,
Aux DC/DC

Aux Pwr Supply

Surge
Ge LAN2 protection,
magnetics,
PoE splitter

Ge LAN1 (SFP 1000BaseX)

GMII

ADC

ADC

FPGA

RAM

Vga

Vga

PWM

ADC

QSPI

Filter

Filter

ADC

PWM

DAC

DAC

CONN.

DEM

LO

Filter

Filter

TRX: IF and RF transceiver

Down converter,
Agc

MOD

LO

7.1.2

Baseband processor

The baseband Processor (BBP) carries out the following operations:

primary and secondary power supply

line interfaces and protections

baseband circuits and packets processing

I and Q signals generation and sampling

I, Q demodulator

Rx baseband filtering

Actuators and measurement points for TRx unit

FPGA debug connector

FPGA

Controller

BBP unit is different depending on the interface type (electrical or optical).

7.1.2.1

Firmware

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed on
two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory benches: one containing the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new firmware release to the stand-by bench without cutting the traffic. Use Bench Switch to activate the bench
in stand-by (SW restart will be performed).

7.1.2.2

Web Lct

The Web Lct is a web interface software already present in the ALFOPlus, which requires Adobe Flash Player
and allows the configuration and the management of the local radio, using LAN Port Management. When
the remote one is configured properly, the whole link can be managed. WEB Lct runs on any browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox etc....). Web Lct console is a free software downloadable from the site www.siaemic.com after registration.
In order to transfer data, WebLCT console or SCT running is necessary.

7.1.2.3

Alarm system

There are two ways of processing the alarms:

through LEDs

through SCT/WebLCT

Alarm associated to ALFOplus can be classified in different groups. Names and composition of these groups
as well as association between alarm classes and relay contact can be defined by the customer.
Alarms are divided into 4 severity levels according to the effects that an alarm might cause to the regular
operation of the unit detecting it. Levels are prioritised as follows:

Critical (red): out-of-service. hw failure. urgent alarm

Major (orange): loss of signal, minimum residual functionality, urgent alarm

minor (yellow): failure neither urgent, high residual functionality, not urgent alarm

warning (light blue): indication or wrong configuration, not urgent alarm

none (green): no alarm or masked alarm

MN.00273.E - 004

55

Critical and Major alarms indicate impossibility of executing a service, hence the faulty units needs to be
serviced. Minor level represents the not urgent alarms which do not prejudice service continuity. Warning
level indicates malfunctions that might be locally removed without having to replace the unit.
Alarm classification can be modified via SCT/WebLCT operator. A short description is given for each alarm
in Alarms section with relevant class.
The visual indication is given by a LED, which can be green or red. The information provided are:

Red light:
-

ON - An internal alarm is active. Connect the PC for troubleshooting

Flashing - An external alarm is active

Green light:
-

Flashing - No radio connection with far-end terminal

ON - Radio connection with far-end terminal is active

During the power-up follows three status of display Led (see Tab.19)
Tab.19 - bootstrap status display

7.1.3

Led

1st step - boot strap

2nd step - Loading WebLCT

3rd step - Ready to


management

Green

OFF

OFF

OFF/BLINKING

Red

OFF

ON

OFF/BLINKING

Orange

ON

OFF

OFF

TRX Transceiver unit

TRX Transceiver consists of the following functional blocks:

power supply dedicated to microwave circuits

Tx baseband filtering

I, Q modulator

frequency synthesizer

microwave transmitter and receiver

IF devices on Rx side

7.1.4

Switch for Ethernet ports

Inside ALFOplus is present an Ethernet switch with 2 external ports line side (electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
or optical 100/1000BaseFX), one internal radio port and one port towards controller (see Fig.16).
Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connected
with the remote equipment.

56

MN.00273.E - 004

Microcontroller

Ethernet
packet switch
10/100BaseT

LAN1
LAN2

Port A

1000BaseT

Radio
1+0

10/100/1000BaseT

Fig.16 - ALFOplus block diagram

Switch function
ALFOplus can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:

to connect two separate LANs

to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network

to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
the traffic in a single LAN.

By default the routing works on basis Mac Address (Layer 2), but it can be enabled on basis VLAN ID, in
Web Lct - Ethernet switch (Enh) - Common Parameters.
The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,
it decides which LAN to send it:

if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded

if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)

otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).

Take account the value of Max Packet Size (byte) when 802.1Q setting is set as DISABLE or FALLBACK
the switch adds 4 Bytes for internal S_Tag. With 802.1Q setting in SECURE (that means that packet VID
must be contained in Virtual LAN table list, otherwise the packet is discarded), no internal TAGs are added.

Ethernet Speed/Duplex function


With electrical interface, in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan, Speed/Duplex can be manually or automatically
activated as half Duplex or Full Duplex 10/100/1000Base-T, while with optical interface, Speed Duplex can
be set as Full Duplex 100/1000Base-X.

Link Loss Forwarding


Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.
If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any
transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports.
With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.

MN.00273.E - 004

57

MDI/MDIX cross-over
For each LAN interface, cross-over cable can be set in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan - Cable Crossover as:

Auto - Lan recognizes automatically the connected cable type (Straight cable or Crossover cable)

MDI (NIC) - Manual crossover wiring type T568A

MDI-X (Switch) - Manual crossover wiring type T568B

With crossover cable it is necessary to use the same wiring format (MDI/MDI or MDI-x/MDI-x) on both
ends. In case of straight cable is the opposite (MDI/MDI-X or MDI-X/MDI).

VLAN functionality
ALFOplus works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:

a fixed word of 2 bytes

3 bits for priority according with 802.1p

1 fixed bit

12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.

Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.

Ethernet Flow Control (802.3x)


A network device asks its adjacent devices to send a pause frame because the input is faster it can process.
The protocol used for this purpose is the flow control (802.2x).

Port Based VLan


Port Based VLan (or Lan Per Port) allows to share the Ethernet traffic (Ingress or Egress) in the internal
SIAE switch.

7.1.5

Synchronisation

Into ALFOplus a synchronisation circuit, called SincE and defined by the standard G.8264, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:

LAN1

LAN2

radio

Internal source

As shown in Fig.17 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.
This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (Synch Loss, Synch Drift, Holdover Freerunning), on the base
of assigned priority, manual forcing and preferential switch.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required synchronisation for the frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used
for the local restart.

58

MN.00273.E - 004

Synchronisation
Source

Alarms
Clock Selector

TE LAN-1

Sync Loss
Sync Drift
Status

TE LAN-2
T0 Reference
Clk

T2 Radio

Selection Logical

Internal Clock

PLL
Circuit

Force Switch
Priority Control
Preferential Switch

Fig.17 - Synchronisation block diagram

7.1.6

Adaptive code modulation

ACM profiles
In ALFOplus radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modulation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.
Available ACM profiles are the following:

4QAM strong

4QAM

16QAM strong

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM (optional).

MN.00273.E - 004

59

These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:

7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

56 MHz

112 MHz (optional).

ACM switching
The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.
The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.

Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 1024QAM increasing the spectral
efficiency

Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation is reduced in the direction from 1024QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,

In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between
max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To
obtain this purpose the ACM in ALFOplus family can be configured via software setting the following parameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.

ACM setting
The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.

Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the
lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Tx Power Ramp
Tx Power Ramp function permits to set Tx power according to the available modulation profiles.

Tx Power Ramp Disabled - Tx power is the same at any modulation profile

Tx Power Ramp Enabled - Maximum Tx power based on the reference modulation

The Tx Power Ramp is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower
Modulation that has been set.

7.1.7

ATPC and ACM interaction

The Automatic Transmission Power Control (ATPC) regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter
depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local
terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher
than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low due to the increase of the hop attenuation, a microprocessor (P), embedded in the ALFOplus, at the receiver side of the remote terminal
sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power.

60

MN.00273.E - 004

A good set of the thresholds is to put the ATPC Low Level threshold higher (or even slightly higher) than
the threshold of the highest modulation scheme of the ACM; this way, the ATPC start to work before than
the received signal is reduced and by consequence will force the system to downgrade the modulation. The
behaviour of the system is to always try to increase the PTX and so the System Gain, before than being
forced to reduce capacity due to modulation downgrade.
Resuming, the correct setting of the thresholds is when the two windows, the ATPC one and the ACM one,
are not overlapped, as per Fig.18.

Local
Remote PRx
dBm

Remote
Rx

Tx

PRx recording
level

PTx actuation
P

P
PTx control

Thresh High

Transmission
Rx

Tx

of PTx control

Thresh Low
Threshold
highest ACM
profile

ACM
range
Hop attenuation (dB)
Local PTx
dBm

PTx max.

ATPC range
PTx min.

Hop attenuation (dB)

Fig.18 - ATPC diagram

MN.00273.E - 004

61

7.2

LOOPS

To control the equipment correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands are forwarded by the WEBLCT program. The available loop facilities are:

Line Loop (Ethernet Port Loop)

Baseband loop

RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)

PHYSICAL
ETHERNET
PORT
Tx
LINE
LOOP

ALFO Plus
BBP-GE

RADIO
BASE
BAND
LOOP

RF Loop

Rx

Fig.19 - Available loops

7.3

RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING

7.3.1

Rate limiting

In SIAE equipment it is possible to apply the Rate Limit, i.e. to limit the total rate passing through an interface. It is possible to apply the rate limiting from 64 kbit/s up to the maximum port speed (up to 1GE).
The values that can be inserted are pre-fixed from 64 kbit up to 10Mbit (64Kb, 128kb, 256kb, 512kb, 1Mb,
2Mb, 3Mb, 4Mb, 5Mb, 6Mb, 7Mb, 8Mb and 9Mb), In the range from 10Mbit/s up to 1Gbit/s the limiting values can be chosen by the user with a 10Mbit/s step. i.e. the minimum selectable granularity is 10Mb/s.

7.3.2

Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2)

SIAE equipment allows limiting the ingress traffic rate on the basis of:

62

LAN port (Bandwidth profile per UNI): a different profile is defined for each LAN port (VLAN ID and
priority are not considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm)

VLAN (Bandwidth profile per EVC): a different profile is defined for different VLANs (priority is not
considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm). Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different
profiles.

VLAN + priority (Bandwidth profile per CoS): a different profile is defined for different couples
VLAN+priorities (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the packet priority is always
considered by the rate limiting algorithm. More than one priority can be included in the same bandwidth profile.

MN.00273.E - 004

In general different criteria can be defined for each port/VLAN/priority. Up to 64 Ingress Filtering Policy
resources can be defined and each bandwidth profile defined on the basis either of LAN port, VLAN or
VLAN+priority consumes 1 of such resources.
In order to define the bandwidth profile, the following parameters must be configured:

CIR (Committed Information rate): it is the admitted ingress rate (green coloured), with values
between 0 kbit/s and 1 Gbit/s

CBS (Committed Burst Rate): it is the maximum size of the token bucket of the green packets, with
values between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.

EIR (Excess Information Rate): it is maximum ingress rate admitted when possible (yellow coloured), with values between 0kbit/s and 1Gbit/s.

EBS (Excess Burst Rate): it is maximum size of the token bucket of the yellow packets, with values
between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.

CF (Coupling Flag): if enabled, the excess token (if any) charged into the green bucket are moved
into the yellow packet bucket.

Red packets, i.e. the ones exceeding the CIR+EIR rate, are automatically discarded. In other words, the
rate obtained with the sum of CIR+EIR is the maximum rate allowed to be transmitted.
The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR, or Peak Information Rate, which
represents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.
According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the bandwidth profile service attribute (Input Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC or
per CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. The
service provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy to
ensure compliance by user traffic.

Green = Trasmitted:

CIR and CBS.

Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion):

EIR and EBS.

Red = Dropped:

traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.

CIR (green)
CBS (green)

EIR (yellow)
EBS (yellow)

dropped (red)
dropped (red)

For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:

Disable

Uni Port Based

EVC C_Vid Based

COS C_Vid + Priority Based

EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based

COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based

According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =

Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vid
with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a
SVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Into switch there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio port.
Any CVID can be used into only one port.
Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.

MN.00273.E - 004

63

Enhanced QoS Management


The SIAE switch scheduler provides enhanced QoS management features. Based on the ingress port (and
optionally also as a function of the VLAN-ID), there are four different modes that can be used to set the
priority of an Ethernet frame:

Ethernet: the priority is set based on the PCP (Priority Code Point) field of the VLAN tag
(IEEE802.1p) (Native 802.1p C_Vid)

MPLS: the priority is set based on the EXP (Experimental Bit) field of the MPLS tag (Native MPLS)

IP: the priority is set based on the DSCP field of the either IPv4 or IPv6 (Native ToS/DSCP)

Default: the priority is set in a static mode and its value is configurable based on the Entering LAN
interface. This Default configuration is a Port Based Priority with default priority value of 0 (lowest
priority). These priority values can be configured by the user within the range from 0 (lowest priority) up to 7 (higher priority). The Default mode is also used when all the other criteria are not applicable.

It is in addition possible to map the EXP quality of the MPLS label into the PCP field of the outer VLAN tag
(802.1p Rewrite with MPLS). Once the priority is assigned, the packet is sent to one of the 8 output queues.
The size of each one of the 8 queues is configurable with one value between the following seven options:
128kbit, 256kbit, 512kbit, 1024kbit, 2048kbit, 4096kbit and 8192kbit.
On the basis of the filling status of the queue, different drop-policy can be applied. In SIAE switch there
are four available policies:

Tail drop: if the packet is arriving into a full queue, it will be discarded

Queue drop: if a new packet is arriving into a full queue, the whole queue is emptied (with the exception of the head packet)

RED: when a new packet is arriving into the queue it has a discarding-probability that is function of
the filling status of the queue. the relation between the probability and the queue status is defined
by means of a SW configurable curve. If the queue is full, the new packet is discarded with probability 1 (like in the Tail drop case).

WRED: it is similar to RED, with the difference that for each queue two drops curves are defined.
the packet in ingress is coloured according to MEF 10.2, i.e.e according to the CIR and EIR ingress
filtering policy defined. As a consequence, WRED can be chosen only if CIR/EIR Ingress filtering policy is enabled for the ingress port. Once coloured, red packets are always discarded, while green
and Yellow packets are managed according to different curves.

The traffic in the queues is then emptied by means of either Strict priority or Weighted Fair Queue algorithm. With the Strict Priority the highest priority takes always precedence. With WFQ the available bandwidth is shared between the different priorities with configurable weights. It is in addition possible to
configure at the same time some queues as Strict Priority and the remaining as WFQ.
Going into details:

Strict Priority: first, all the packets from the highest priority queue are transmitted, then all the
packets from the second queue, and so on.

Weighted Fair Queueing (W.F.Q.): the packets are sent on the radio following a rule based on the
weight assigned to each Queue.
Each queue i with WFQ is given a weight (importance) Wi.
WFQ guarantees a minimum service rate to queue i
Ri = R*Wi/(W1+W2+....+Wn) [Rate of the queue i]
Where:
R = rate of the servant (capacity available on the MW link)
W i= weight of the Queue taken in consideration
Wn = weight of the last Queue with WFQ enabled
This means that the rate of the queue is a fraction of the total bandwidth that depends
on the weight assigned to the Queue.

For example if the weights are set as Fig.20.

64

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.20 Means that the Serving Priority of the frames present in the queues will be:

the packets present in the Queue 7 will be transmitted with a Race 8/35

the packets present in the Queue 6 will be transmitted with a race 8/35

......

the packets present in the Queue 0 will be transmitted with a rate 1/35.

7.4

CONGESTION AVOIDANCE

The Congestion Avoidance is a protocol that permits to discard some frames before congestion occurs.
When the queue is full there is a congestion situation, this means that the resources are not enough to
serve all the packets and there is not enough room in the queue for more storage. In this case some packet
must be dropped. The choice of the dropping policy has different effects on the network. In case of congestion, the TCP/IP protocol reduces the transmitting windows and therefore the amount of traffic transmitted. The TCP/IP protocol increases the transmitting window very slowly to allow the network to solve
the congestion issues.
This means that, when congestion occurs, some selective dropping has to be done.
There are different policies of dropping that can be adopted:

Tail: in this case the last packets that come to the full queue are dropped (default configuration)

Queue: in this case all the queue is emptied, i.e. all the packets present in the Queue are dropped

Red: Random Early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming packets are
dropped randomly regardless if the frames are marked yellow or green (for more details on yellow
or green frames please refer to the paragraph 7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to
MEF 10.2))

WRed: Weighted Random early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming
packets are dropped randomly. First are dropped the packets coloured in yellow and then are
dropped the packet coloured in green, see Fig.21.

MN.00273.E - 004

65

Fig.21 - Red curve


Once WRed is enabled the threshold of Smin Smax and Pmax for the Green and Yellow frames have to be set.
The value set the points of the curve shown in Fig.21. There are some predetermined profiles to be enabled:

Profile 1:
-

Smin= 30

Smax=60

Pmax=10

Profile 2:
-

Smin= 20

Smax=40

Pmax=10

These profiles can be set for the Yellow Frames (Y) and Green Frames (G) as well. These values represent:

66

Smin: represents the threshold after which the switch starts dropping packets

Sman and Pmax: are the thresholds that makes the curve of Drop Percentage/Average Queue Occupation change. After this point the dropping packets increase rapidly.

Red Gentle: after the point represented by Smax and Pmax: the Drop percentage can increase to
a 100% (RED) or can linearly increase. the choice of how to increase, directly or linearly to a 100%
is manage by disabling or enabling the RED Gentle.

RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches
Smin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %
of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);

RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,
Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packets
are dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and
Smax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of randomly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/
100%;

WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,
one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green);
no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are

MN.00273.E - 004

dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);

WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line for
Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;
for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;

WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the
stop and go behaviour (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.
Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.

Ethernet Frame Fragmentation


QoS preserve High priority traffic, by giving it precedence during traffic congestions. However, in case of
real time traffic also latency and jitter are important factors. Latency is strictly related to the line speed
and usually can be managed by designing the network topology in a proper way (e.g. by limiting the maximum number of hops in link chains). Jitter is instead a more sensitive parameter because it depends on
the traffic conditions.
In fact, when a High priority packet has to be sent over the radio link it is scheduled on a High Priority
queue. However, before to be sent over the radio link it has to wait that the packet currently in transmission (even a Best Effort packet) will be entirely sent. This waiting time can considerably change depending
on the best effort packet size (from 64bytes to 1518 bytes of even more in case of jumbo frames). One
technique used to mitigate this phenomenon is packet fragmentation, i.e. longer frames are subdivided in
smaller fragments at Tx side. A label is added to the packet in order to number these subframes. At Rx
side the original frame is rebuilt after all the fragments are received. In this way, the maximum waiting
time for a High Priority packet is reduced to the sub-frame size (some hundreds of bytes), providing sensitive benefits to the packet jitter.
The SIAE switch allows to fragment Ethernet frames with two options: 256 or 512 Bytes.
For example: in case the radio is serving a 1024Byte frame in the lowest (queue 0) and there is an incoming
frame (256 bytes) in the highest priority queue (queue 7). The packet in the highest priority should be
served first, but since the servant is busy processing the packet in the lower queues, the 256Byte frame
has to wait until the radio has processed the 1024 Byte frame, see Fig.22.

MN.00273.E - 004

67

Fig.22 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled


With the fragmentation enabled the time that the packet in higher queues have to wait is smaller. With
fragmentation enabled the radio divides the 1024 byte packet into 4 packets of 256 Bytes and the servant
can transmit the first frame of 256 Byte in the lower queue and then transmit the high priority traffic, reducing the jitter in the network, see Fig.23.

Fig.23 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled

Enhanced VLAN Management


The SIAE switch provides the following enhanced VLAN management features:

68

VLAN rewriting

Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority

MN.00273.E - 004

VLAN rewriting
VLAN rewriting is a feature available on radio side that allows to rewrite the VID of C-TAG of the packet
received (uplink side) or sent (downlink side) by the switch.
On uplink side (packets received on LAN interface by the switch and sent to the radio) the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the following criteria:
-

LAN port + C-VID: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis
of its original C-VID and the LAN port where it has been received.

LAN port + C-VID + priority: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured
on the basis of its original C-VID + priority and the LAN port where it has been received.

On uplink side it is possible to configure for all the LAN ports up to 64 LAN port + C-VID or LAN port + CVID + priority criteria.
On downlink side (packets received on radio side and sent by the switch on the LAN interface):

the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the C-VID of the received packet. I.e., new values of CVID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis of its original C_VID. It is possible
to configure up to 64 C-VID criteria in downlink, independently by the uplink configuration.

C-VID can be removed selectively. It is possible to select the C-VID, enable the option Removed
and select the Output interface. In other words on downlink side it is possible to select the C-VID
to be remove and the correspondent Output LAN.

Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority


VLAN staking (also named QinQ) is a feature that allows an Ethernet frame to include more than one IEEE
802.1Q TAG. The scope of VLAN staking is to differentiate the traffic at different levels when the packets
must cross networks managed by different entities.
The SIAE switch radio supports the Vlan staking. Once a packet enters into the radio it is possible to add
a new IEEE 802.1Q TAG. The VID of the new TAG can be set based on different criteria:
-

Ingress port of the packet

C-VID and priority of the packet when received on the ingress port

The new TAG is added to the packet as a S-TAG. The Ethertype field of the TAG can be set either to standard values (0x88A8, 0x9100, 0x9200, 0x9300) or to any other custom values.

Packet Compression
The SIAE switch provides header packet compression. This feature allows to compress the packet header
by transmitting over the radio link proprietary labels in place of long and repetitive header field.
Multi-layer Packet Compression supports the following protocols: Ethernet, MPLS, IPv4/IPv6, UDP and RTP
and LTE S1 interface tunnelling. This latter cover the case of LTE eNodeB backhauling on S1 interface,
where the eUE traffic (either IPv4 or IPv6) is enveloped into a GTP-U tunnel. The Header compressed in
this case includes (IPv4+UDP+GTP-U of the S1 interface)+(IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP of the eUE traffic inserted
into the tunnel).
When enabled, the user can select which header have to be compressed considering the following maximum limits:

the total header field size cannot exceed 124 bytes

the total header field size after internal coding cannot exceed 118 bytes. the internal coding is required by SIAE switch in order to perform the compression task.

In Fig.24 are detailed the different header fields that can be selected with their weight in terms of header
field size and header field size after internal coding.

MN.00273.E - 004

69

Header field
Header
size after
field size
internal coding
(Bytes)
(Bytes)

 Ethernet


+14

+12.5

+4

+2

+(4*n)

+(2*n)

+(4*n)

+(4*n)

+4

+3.5

IPv4 only (default)

+20

+19.5

IPv4 or IPv6

+40

+39.5

+8

+8

+12

+12

+100

+99

C-TAG (802.1Q)

Q-in-Q (802.1ad)

Max number of S-TAG (from 1 to 2)

(default=1)

 MPLS
Max number of MPLS labels (from 1 to 3), PW included

(default=1)

Control Word (RFC4385)

 IP+

UDP

RTP

Tunneling OPv4 - IPv4/IPv6(IPv4+UDP+GTP-U+IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP)

Fig.24 - Header compression

LAG - Link Aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad)


Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on SIAE switch that allows assigning up to 4 physical links
to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed Ethernet link.
SIAE switch support IEEE802.3ad LAPC (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). LACP allows a network device
to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer (directly connected device
that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity and/or protection line of the logical link
and/or protection line, LACP provides additional advantages:

70

Failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity)

MN.00273.E - 004

it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before the staring of data transmission over
the trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.

LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment deployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. However, in passive mode it acts as speak when spoken to and
therefore it can be used as a way of controlling accidental loops (as long as the other device is in active
mode). SIAE switch implements an active LACP.
A Line Trunk can aggregate up to 2 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:

all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s)

all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode

When a Trunk is defined on SIAE switch, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated lines.
As a result, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated lines
multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.25, two full duplex - 1Gbit/s connection
are grouped into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this
configuration, the line aggregation is used as line protection, although it can transport 2 Gbit/s capacity.

LAN1

1 Gbit/s

LAN1

LAN2

1 Gbit/s

LAN2

ALFOplus

ALFOplus

Line
trunking
2 Gbit/s
Fig.25 - Line trunking
To enable the Link Aggregation on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group Enable - Trunk1 or
Enable - Trunk2 in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.

Line Protection through distributed ELP


ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on SIAE switch that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect a switch to another network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to forward and
receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking state). If the
forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The maximum switching
time is around 900msec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based on the
status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.
It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause longer traffic recovery times.
To enable the Ethernet Line Protection on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group Enable Prot1 or Enable - Prot2 in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.

MN.00273.E - 004

71

7.5

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE)

This protocol can be used in any point-to-point Ethernet link. The aim of this protocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.

7.5.1

Service layer OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE equipment support CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provide the tools to monitor the Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application can
include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
The Standards define:

72

Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. Here follows a picture explaining the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains.

ALFOplus: in SIAE equipment one Maintenance Domain can be specified. At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. The MEPs are markers that
define the end of a domain and are in charge of originating OAM frames. In a domain also MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-points. The MEPs
and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the domain and
the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attenuation must be paid to use the same
MD label in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with same value of
MD domain but different MD labels belongs to different Domains.

MN.00273.E - 004

CE

PE

PE

Access
Network

Operator 1
Core Network

CE
Access
Network

Operator 2
Core Network

High Level
Customer

MEP

MEP

Service
Provider

MEP

MEP

MEP

MIP

MIP

MEP

Operator 1

Low Level
MEP

MIP

MIP

MEP

Operator 2

Fig.26 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains

A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.

ALFOplus: when a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to
a Domain and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance
Association, the VLAN, either S-VLAN or C-VLAN, has to be specified in the VLAN Table. In each
SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular attention must be paid to use
the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e. different MA labels on the same
VLAN correspond to different MA associations.

At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
pollings coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.

ALFOplus: Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once
chosen the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be spec-

MN.00273.E - 004

73

ified. Two Directions are possible, MEP


and MEP
. With MEP
configured the OAM
PDUs are sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP
configured the OAM PDUs
are sent from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to same MA must have different MEP IDs. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be
habilitated on the equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.
The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are listed
hereafter:

Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a virtual connection. this message can only be originated by a MEP.
ALFOplus: is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic
reply from the destination entity.

LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connection. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs.
ALFOplus: the number of Loopback Messages in SIAE equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs
in the same MA. This is done through the Remote MEP application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.

Link Trace Protocol: this protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equipment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. the MIPs
that are deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the initiating
MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices deployed
in the path and their order.

Remote Defect Indicator: this feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a RDI
to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages
of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able to check
the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check Message.
ALFOplus: this feature is present in SIAE equipment and the presence of this alarm can be checked
as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.

7.6

ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON

RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
SIAE equipment support RMONv1, first MIB, as defined in RFC2819. This MIB contains real-time LAN statistics e.g. utilization, collisions and CRC errors. These counters are managed locally into the radio equipment and are defined independently for each port of the device (both LAN and Radio interfaces). SIAE
NMS systems collect periodically this data and store it into the network database. More in details, the RMON
implementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:

74

RMON Statistics: These are the counters data collected in real time by the Network Equipment.
These data are stored in the network equipment itself and, the NMS Statistics viewer can visualize
this data with the Refresh button.

RMON - History: This is managed by the NMS through the collection of the counters data from the
Network Equipment. After a periodical polling to the Network Element, the NMS collects all the data
and these data are seen as the RMON History.

MN.00273.E - 004

In other words, the RMON Statistics are the data that are collected and stored in the Network Equipment,
while the RMON History is an aggregation of the data collected from each network equipment and the
database is located in the NMS.

7.7

RMON COUNTERS

RMON statistics are composed by counters for each port of the device that are stored in the equipment
deployed on field.
Into the equipment it can be chosen to store the values with a sampling period that can be defined between
two values: 1 min, 15 min, or both. For each sampling period the counters values are stored into the equipment. After a predefined period (polling period), all the RMON data stored by the equipment are get by the
NMS. The polling period can be either less than 4 hours (if the sampling period is 1 min) or 1 day (in case
the sampling period is 15 min). The NMS aggregates the files received to create a bigger database with
the History of the Performance Monitoring samples.
Here below are described the RMON counters available for each device interface (both LAN and radio
ports):

DropEvents: Total number of events (frames, or whole queue contents) in which packets were
dropped by the interface due to lack of resources.

Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.

Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.

BroadcastPkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.

Multicast Pkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

CRC Align Errors: Total number of packets received that had a length between 64 and the Max Packet Size configured on the equipment switch (in any case not exceeding 10240 bytes) with bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Undersize Pkts: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise well formed.

Oversize Pkts: The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than
maximum allowable length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise
well formed.

Fragments: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Jabbers: Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, it
can be set to 1522, 2048 bytes or 10240 Kbytes) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).

Collisions: The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.

Utilization Rx: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean RX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.

Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.

Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.

BroadcastPkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to the broadcast
address.

Multicast Pkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to a multicast address.

MN.00273.E - 004

75

Utilization TX: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean TX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.

All the counters described above are part of the RMON statistics and it is not possible to collect only a subset of them. It is however possible to select on which equipment interface activate the RMON statistics (for
example, they can be enabled only on the radio interface). This allows reducing the total amount of PM
data, for example avoiding data collection from unused LAN interfaces. This can be done on all Payload
Interfaces (regardless if electrical or optical), the Radio interfaces are included as well.

7.8

ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS

In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port with SIAE equipment it is possible to set on the Radio interface
the RMON counters per Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters,
the Service and Priority counters can be activated for the following variables.

Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.

Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.

Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.

Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.

DropEvents: Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface due
to lack of resources.

The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).
The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipment
and configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Counters
but not the Service and Priority RMON.
In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted through Web LCT. This
means that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of these
RMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet Counters.
It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.

7.8.1

Priority RMON

The Priority RMON are based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority; this
implies that:

the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number of
the queues available in SIAE switch.

if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same Queue, the Priority RMON will work with one
Probe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as Same Priority Traffic and the
Priority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue

In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in SIAE switch). Each probe
counts the variables listed above (Octets TX, Pkts TX, Octets RX, Pkts RX and DropEvents).
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.

76

MN.00273.E - 004

7.8.2

Service RMON

The Service RMON counters allow the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Service (Vlan Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.
Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag.
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.

7.9

SYNCHRONISM

Network Synchronisation is a growing subject related to the network evolution from TDM to Ethernet payload.
In this chapter it will be described the different features supported by SIAE switch equipment for the synchronization transport. The decision of the correct source to enable and how to pass the synchronisation
signal to customers equipment depends on network situation which has to be evaluated case by case.

Sync

Sync

Sync

2G BTS

Sync

Sync

E1 TDM
ALFOplus

ALFOplus

ETH
E1 TDM

ETH

Reference
Clock

Sync

3G NodeB
Full IP

Ethernet/TDM
Network

Fig.27 - Node B and BTS synch


The main concept is to transfer the synchronization signal throughout the network deployed. This implies
that SIAE equipment will take the clock signal from the concentration points (POC) and transfer it towards
the tail sites and distribute the synchronization signal to the external equipment such as NodeBs and BTS
(see Fig.27).

Input
CK IN

ALFOplus
SETS

Output
CK OUT

Fig.28 - SETS circuit


Going into details, this means that each SIAE equipment (represented in Fig.28) will have, at least, one
Input and one Output CK.
Input (CK IN) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment get the Clock signal from, these could be
another SIAE IDU or external equipment.
Output (CK OUT) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment provides the Clock Signal to, these could
be another SIAE IDU or external equipment.

MN.00273.E - 004

77

Internally to each SIAE equipment the SETS identify the input and output types of interfaces by the following codes:

TE: This code represents an Ethernet interface (LAN) used as input CK

T0: Output interface. This code represents the Internal Clock

The purpose of the above list is to list the different acronyms used by the SETS that may be present in the
configuration screens.
When the Synchronization is enabled in SIAE MW equipment, in the configuration screen, there are some
features to be used for maintenance or refined tuning of the clock propagation.

Fig.29 - Synchronisation menu


Here below are listed the different configurations to be made:

78

Status Control: this is a forced status for maintenance purposes of the SETS. It can be forced in:
-

Free Running: Independently from the synchronization signal received, the clock is locked onto
the internal clock.

Hold Over: The SETS is locked into the internal clock which tries to preserve the frequency
received when the SETS was locked.

Locked: in this case the SETS is locked to a source of synchronization.

Time Settings: these are general setting for the synchronization


-

Hold Off Time: Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of a synchronism source become invalid (not present or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and the first input source having a valid signal will
be used.

WTR Time: i.e. Wait-To-Restore, this is a wait time to avoid oscillations. Time (expressed in
minutes) that has to pass before allowing the selected valid input source to be actually used
within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.

LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time: are controls that avoid oscillations of Alarms. When one alarm
raises up, it has to be active for at least the LTI Set Time and when it disappears it has to be off
for at least LTI Reset Time.

Enabled: Enables the SSM in the equipment

MN.00273.E - 004

7.10

SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM

SIAE equipment is able to select among different sources of synchronization. A priority has to be assigned
to enable each source, with a value ranging from 1 to 9 included. The priority 1 corresponds to the maximum value, while the priority 9 corresponds to the minimum value. The priority shall be used to select in
which order the different synch sources must be used. In case the Priority is set as Disabled the correspondent interface is not used as a synchronization source.

Fig.30 - Sources of synchronisation


The selectable sources of synchronisation are listed below. For each source it is also listed in square brackets the correspondent acronym used by the SETS:

Radio Interface: it is possible to have 1 radio interfaces (1+0).

GE Interface [TE]: to identify which LANs are the sources of synchronization they have to be chosen
under TE LAN A and TE LAN B. This implies that a maximum of 2 LAN interfaces can be set as
source of synchronization. The AGS-H reference clock can be received on any one the 4 LAN interfaces, independently from the fact they are electrical or optical. In order to receive the synchronization signal (and regardless of the SSM status) the GE interface has to be set as Slave. The
configuration choices and other details are explained in SSM on Ethernet Interfaces.

Internal Clock [T0]: with the Synchronization not enabled the IDU is locked into its internal clock

In case SSM is not enabled, the equipment switches from one source of synchronization to another following the priority scale, starting from the source set to priority 1 and scaling to the sources with higher values
of priority (i.e. lower priority level). The synch source switch occurs when the present source suffers one
of the following events:

The source of synchronization is not physically available

The clock deviation is bigger than 4.6 ppm (maximum deviation that the internal clock can follow).

In other words, if the LAN1 is selected as first source (priority 1) of synchronization, and the LAN2 is selected as the second source (priority 2) of synchronization, the SIAE equipment will be synchronized on
the LAN1 until the cable will be physically unplugged or the LAN1 frequency and phase will be out of their
specified ranges. Once one of these events occurs, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization to the second source listed. If the second source listed is unplugged or out of maximum range then
the SIAE equipment will switch to the third source and so on.
In case no other synch sources are available the SIAE equipment will go on Internal Source, i.e. the internal clock present in SIAE equipment. In this condition the internal clock will be kept in hold status, trying
to keep the last synchronization reference received. In these conditions, the internal clock of SIAE equip-

MN.00273.E - 004

79

ment has a reliability of 0.3 ppm over 24 h. When the SIAE equipment switches to internal clock, it propagates a quality of SEC SDH Equipment Clock.

7.11

PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Once the SIAE equipment is synchronized, the clock signal has to be passed toward external equipment or
other SIAE equipment. SIAE equipment can give the synchronization signal through different interfaces.

Fig.31 - Provide synchronism


The interfaces that are available to provide synchronization to other SIAE or external equipment are:

Radio: this interface is passing the synchronism automatically to the remote equipment. No configuration is needed.

GE Interfaces: the TX CK of the all GE lines (i.e. LAN 1 and 2) is locked to the SETS. In this way,
the CK can be passed through these connections to other equipment provided that they support
Synchronous Ethernet. The GE Interfaces when used in Electrical can provide the CK signal to other
equipment: in this case the equipment port role must be Master. Once the synchronization is enabled in the SIAE equipment, automatically all the LAN interfaces are locked onto the SETS. This
implies that the synchronization signal is automatically provided onto all the LAN interfaces.

The choices of the interface to pass the clock signal depend strictly on the external equipment. This means
that in first place it is necessary to establish the possible sources of synchronization available on the external equipment. Depending on the availability of these sources, SIAE equipment will be configured with
the correspondent interface to pass the clock signal.

80

MN.00273.E - 004

7.12

G.8264 SSM SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE

The SSM is a protocol that transmits the quality of the synchronization message throughout the network
(G.781).
In the synchronization network the transmission of the quality of the clock allows the network to be scalable and to provide redundancy. In case of failure of SIAE equipment or cable, it is helpful to provide redundancy for clock propagation in order to avoid synchronization loops.
Synchronisation loops could happen after a failure when two equipment are synchronising each other on
the same physical connection. If this happens the equipment will not present any alarm on the synchronization but will generate and propagate a not reliable clock. The quality of the clocks that are propagated
are:

PRC: Primary reference Clock Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)

SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)

SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local

SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)

DNU: Do not Use This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock

Here above are listed in order from the better quality clock (PRC Primary Reference Clock) to the worse
quality clock (DNU Do Not Use). The better the quality is the more time can the SIAE equipment stay in
holdover (Internal Clock) without a degradation of the payload. In other words, better is the quality, longer
can remain reliable the clock in holdover cases.
The DNU quality is always propagated on the source on which the equipment is locked for synchronization.
In this way the Loops of synchronization are easily avoided.
Unless the user forces the CK quality input/output, SIAE equipment reads the quality present in the input
interfaces. This means that, unless there is some users modifications, SIAE equipment propagates the
quality of the clock as it is. I.e. the output quality is the same as the input quality.
E.g.: If in the input interface (POC Site) there is a quality of SSUT of the CK signal, SIAE equipment will
pass throughout the network this synchronization signal with a quality message of SSUT.
In case the SIAE equipment is in Holdover (internal clock) it changes the quality of the synchronization to
SEC quality. With SSM enabled, SIAE equipment will choose the sources of the synchronization based on
the better quality received.
In general, the equipment selects the synch source with the following criteria:

it chooses the sources with the highest quality

if more than one source have the same quality, the one with the highest priority is selected (i.e. the
ones that have the smaller priority value, from 1 up to 9)

in any case, if a DNU quality is received on the highest priority source, this latter is discarded and
the equipment selects an alternative source.

Example 1: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)
b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 1)
In case the sources have the same priority, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization to the best quality, in this case (b) the Radio with SSUT quality.
Example 2: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the different quality and different priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)
b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 2)
In case the sources have different priority and quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of
synchronization with higher quality, in this case (b) the Radio with Priority 2 and quality SSUT. However, if a DNU quality would be received on Radio, the IDU will switch the synch source to LAN1 interface.
Example 3: if one IDU has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same quality:
a. LAN1 with quality SSUT (Priority 1)

MN.00273.E - 004

81

b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 2)


In case the sources have equal quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization
with higher priority, in this case (a) the LAN1 with Priority 1 and quality SSUT. However, if a DNU quality
would be received on LAN1, the SIAE equipment will switch the synch source to Radio port.
The quality of the synchronism has to be enabled for each SIAE equipment and can be transported on the
following interfaces:

On the Ethernet Interfaces through a standard protocol (according to ITU-T G.8264)

Radio interface with Local/Remote Telemetry: Depending on the MW link configuration (1+0) the
SSM messages are passed to the remote SIAE equipment in different ways.
-

1+0 Configuration: In this case there is one Local/Remote Telemetry passing the SSM messages

Within this configuration table there are also some maintenance configurations such as:

Forced Switch: this command allows the operator to force the SETS to lock to a predetermined
source. This command is above all other configurations. This means that the SETS will be locked
onto this source even if the cable is unplugged

Preferential switch: In case two sources have equal priority it is possible to set a Preferential Source.
In any case the quality is the main parameter of choice, then when two sources have the same priority, the preferential source is chosen.

In relation to the SSM, it is possible to:

Visualize the quality of the clock signal received and transmitted (Rx Quality and Tx Quality)

Overwrite the Quality received or transmitted (Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Quality) and the choices
are:
-

PRC: Primary reference Clock Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)

SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)

SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local

SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)

DNU: Do not Use This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock

The Overwrite of the Quality of the Clock is configurable by the user and simply forces in input or output
the quality.

7.12.1

SSM on Ethernet Interfaces

In order to propagate the clock signal through the Ethernet 1GE Electrical interface it is necessary to set
correctly the master and slave option for each interface. It is possible to assign the roles (Master or Slave)
statically (as set up for source LAN) or dynamically (according to Synch direction).
This because the Master interface transmits the clock to the Slave interface and in case the direction of
propagation of the clock has to be changed (line failure, insufficient quality, etc..), the master and slave
assignment has to be re-negotiated with a consequent loss of traffic. This re-negotiation implies an interruption of the traffic from 2.4 to 2.6 seconds.
SIAE equipment allows to set the role of the interfaces to According to synch direction (dynamic), the
flow of the propagation of the clock signal is automatically changed depending on the transferring direction
of the CK.
If the role of the interfaces is set to As set up for source LAN (Static), the flow of the propagation of the
clock signal is fixed (see Fig.32).

Fig.32 - LAN synchronisation method

82

MN.00273.E - 004

The other configuration present in SIAE equipment that manage the role of the LAN interfaces (Master/
Slave) is present in the main configuration of each LAN interface. Regardless if each LAN interface is set
manually as Master/Slave or with autonegotiation, the setting of dynamic or static in the SSM configuration
is privileged. In other words if the Master/Slave are set manually in the interface configuration and in the
SSM is set According to synch direction, if needed, the role of the LAN changes according to synch directions.
When an electrical GE interface is in Master State (despite from the fact that it comes from a static or
dynamic setting) every synchronization signal that is coming from this interface has automatically the
quality of DNU. This does not occur for optical GE or FE interfaces (Electrical and Optical), where the Master and Slave roles are not foreseen and so the transmitting direction for the clock can be exchanged
without any port role re-negotiation.
All the Ethernet interfaces are locked on the SETS, regardless which LAN interfaces are set as sources of
synchronization. Nevertheless the Overwrite RX Quality and Overwrite TX Quality can be applied only
on the LAN interfaces used as sources of synchronization.

MN.00273.E - 004

83

84

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 3.
INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM

8.1

GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION

The installation, maintenance or removal of antenna systems require qualified experienced personnel.
SIAE installation instructions have been written for such a personnel. Antenna system should be inspected
once a year by qualified personnel to verify proper installation, maintenance and condition of equipment.
SIAE disclaims any liability or responsibility for the results of improper or unsafe installation practices.
ALFOplus equipment is a full-outdoor IP Ethernet radio link system, for transport capacity up to 500 Mbit/
s, designed to establish LAN-LAN connections. For the details related to the actual used frequency band
refer to the label on the equipment.
The system is provided with an integrated antenna; however, in case integrated antenna is not used, it
should be connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequency band.

Warning This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.


Warning Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the

frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.


Warning The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regula-

tion for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.


Warning The symbol

indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate collection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more
information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.

MN.00273.E - 004

85

8.2

GENERAL

The ALFOplus radio system is made up of an outdoor unit, protected by a metallic shield.
Compliance to electromagnetic compatibility is guaranteed through the following precautionary measures:

during the design phase


-

use of protection circuits against electrical dischargers

use of filters on the power supply input circuits against noise propagating on the power supply
wires

during the installation phase


-

use of shielded cables

use of ground connections.

The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paraghaphs and it must be done
only by service person suitably trained.
Attention: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs, chosen for local and remote side,
have equal subband and different Tx module (H and L).

8.3

ELECTRICAL WIRING

The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pin-out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.

8.4

CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS

During the final installation, protect the ODU by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in ones country.
The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the auxiliary connector M12P5 from the
ODU or disconnecting the LAN PoE cable.
The typical magneto thermal switch has characteristics at least 48Vdc @1.5A with overcurrent relay class
C or K tripping curve.
Seal the auxiliary power connector when the radio is powered via PoE, in order to avoid the removal of the
cover without tools.

86

MN.00273.E - 004

8.5

GROUNDING CONNECTION

Fig.33 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.

Indoor

ODU
unit
1

IDU
unit

(+) (-)

Station
ground

Local
ground

ground
rack

Legend
1. IDU grounding point, copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq.
mm. The Faston is available on the IDU both sides.
2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16
sq. mm (V60052)
3. IDUODU interconnection cable.
4. Grounding cable (ICD00072F) kit type cable copper or copper alloy to connect the shield of interconnection cable.
5. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m.
6. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be 16 sq. mm
Fig.33 - Grounding connection

8.5.1

Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (universal - no tools)

Follow the procedure. See Tab.20.

MN.00273.E - 004

87

Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions


Description

Remove the cable jacket by 30mm width approximately.


Take care not to damage the copper conductor. Clean
and dry the application area.

Remove the protective film from the butyle sealing


paste.
Put the contact in position on the cable, by firmly pressing on the cable jacket, checking the adherence of the
butyle sealing paste. The contact is firmly positioned on
the cable jacket.

Wrap the copper mesh around the contact and outer


conductor (at least 4 revolutions).
Block the mesh terminal under the contact tooth.
Cut the exceeding mesh length.

Remove the self-agglomerating tape protective film.


Carefully wrap tight the tape around contact and cable,
following the suitable mean line.
Tape adheres remaining in position and progressively
self-agglomerates.

Connect the earthing cable.

88

MN.00273.E - 004

8.6

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13mm torque wrench

N.1 15 mm torque wrench

N.1 17 mm torque wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench.

8.7

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

According to polarization (vertical or horizontal), assemble the antenna and support bracket.

Attention: These instructions are fully detailed in a separate manual Antennas - Code: MN.00249.E

depending on the type of used antenna.

Installation of the ODU

Installation onto the pole of the supporting bracket

ODU grounding.

8.7.1

Standard coupling kit

The standard coupling kit is mounted on ALFOplus by means of four screws.

Coupling kit assembly procedure


See Fig.34 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU. Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four
nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four screws.

8.8

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

8.8.1

ODU (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

Centring ring and relevant screws

M10 bolts

ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

MN.00273.E - 004

89

Mounting kit 1+1 version

Centring ring and relevant screws

M10 bolts for hybrid and ODU mounting

Hybrid mechanical body

Polarization twist disk (see Fig.36)

2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

8.8.1.1

1+0 ODU with integrated antenna

Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
provided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.35.

Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the
circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange

Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)

Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to
have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook, use 15mm spanner)

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder:
-

vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts

Rotate 30 clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46mm)

Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the LAN cable.

Attention: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof IPx5.

8.8.1.2

1+1 ODU with integrated antenna

Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
by antenna producer.
Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna has been installed onto the pole, follow the procedure below, see Fig.37
Mounting the hybrid (1) on the back of the antenna:

90

Position the three holes circular flange on the antenna flange and align the holes on the circular
flange with the relevant holes on the antenna flange

Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2mm)

MN.00273.E - 004

Prepare the polarization disk (see Fig.36) with the two O-rings: seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 must be applied to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves; each O-ring must be inserted in
the proper track on each surface of the disk

Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (antenna side), to set the polarization, as shown in Fig.36 and tighten the four screws (torque value as
in Tab.21)

Mount the hybrid on the back of the antenna tightening four M10 bolts (2) with crossed method
(first bolt on high position left, second bolt on the opposite side following the diagonal, then do the
same with the other two bolts (see Fig.37)

Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (3) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15mm spanner

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves and insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the OU
is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid

Rotate 30 clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)

Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the block plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable

Attention: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof IPX5

Repeat for the other ODU on the other side.


Tab.21 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

1 Nm

MN.00273.E - 004

91

8.9

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

Diameter of the pole

8.9.1

60-114 mm

ODU (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws

M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting

ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

Mounting kit 1+1 version

Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

M10 25mm bolts for hybrid and ODUs mounting

Hybrid mechanical body

Polarization twist disk (see Fig.36)

2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

8.9.1.1

1+0 ODU with separated antenna

See Fig.38.

92

Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =
46Nm).

Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.38 the antenna flange is shown in two
different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the waveguide must be installed.

On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in
holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt
should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of
hook (4), use 15mm spanner).

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.

Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna flange:
-

vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts

Rotate 30 clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

MN.00273.E - 004

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
=46 Nm)

Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable

Attention: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof IPX5

8.9.1.2

1+1 ODU with separated antenna

See Fig.39.

Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)

Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (antenna side), to set the polarization as shown in Fig.36 and tighten the four screws (torque value as
in Tab.21)

Mount the hybrid on the supporting plate (1), tightening four M10 bolts (5) with method cross (first
bolt on high left position, second bolt on opposite side following the diagonal, then do the same with
the other two bolts (see Fig.39)

Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (7) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15 mm spanner

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the ODU
is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid

Rotate 30 clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)

Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable

Repeat for the other ODU on the other side

Attention: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof IPX5

8.9.1.3

Waveguide towards the antenna

After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration or in 1+1 configuration, the waveguide towards the
antenna must be installed.

1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In
case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.22 for details.

1+1: the waveguide must be fixed to the hybrid. In case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding
can damage the waveguide, see Tab.22 for details.

MN.00273.E - 004

93

8.10

GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground with the available grounding bolt and eyelet terminal, making reference to details of Fig.34.
Tab.22 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

a.

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

94

MN.00273.E - 004

O-ring

Coupling kit

Fig.34 - ODU with standard coupling kit

MN.00273.E - 004

95

Fig.35 - 1+0 ODU installation

96

MN.00273.E - 004

Reference

Fig.36 - Polarization disk

MN.00273.E - 004

97

Fig.37 - 1+1 ODU installation

98

MN.00273.E - 004

114-60
3
1

4
5

4
Fig.38 - 1+0 antenna flange

MN.00273.E - 004

99

7
4
3

Fig.39 - 1+1 antenna flange

100

MN.00273.E - 004

8.11

USER CONNECTORS

ALFOplus provides an auxiliary connector and 2 types of Amphenol connector, which guarantee Ethernet
port compatibility for both version: Gigabit electrical and optical.

8.11.1

Auxiliary connector

The auxiliary 5 pin circulator connector has various functions and it is used when:

the Power over Ethernet injector through the data Lan cable is not available or as additional power
supply source (48Vdc in 1+1 configuration)

during the alignment of antenna (remember to enable received signal strength indicator in
Equipment menu - General preset RSSI.
It is recommended after the alignment to set RSSI as Disable not to overload CPU.

In case of emergency, if ALFOplus IP address is unknown, connect it with serial console (F03594),
as shown in Fig.56 using hyperterminal 115200 8, N, 1 and press any button o access in the login

The available auxiliary cables already assembled:

F03594 cable for laboratory use only (see Fig.56)

F03608 2xM12 5P pointing cable (remove it after commissioning pointing) (see Fig.57)
Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable
SIAE code

Descriptions

P04185

Female 5 pin M12 shielded connector

M10154

Outdoor power supply cable


2x0.75mmq for distance 100m

M10166

Outdoor power supply cable


2x1.5mmq for distance 200m

MN.00273.E - 004

View

101

Assembly steps for M12 male/female connector and conductor


a= slide on parts
b= strip conductor, widen shield and lay around the shielding ring, cuf off projecting mesh. Slide cores
through the housing. mount shielding ring, gasket and clamping cage. Tighten pressure screw to fix the
cable. Screw down cores. Mount male/female part. Tighten pressure screw.

Fig.40 - Functional drawing

Schematic diagram

Fig.41 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)

Fig.42 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view

102

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector


Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector

8.11.2

Pinout

Description

Vdc (-) = -48 Volts

Vdc (+) = 0 Volts

Rx_Console

Tx_Console

GND_Console

Shield

Ground

RJ45 connector

The electrical RJ45 connection to ALFOplus is guaranteed only with coded connector; do not use other modalities of connectors.
Part to be assembled (see Tab.25)
Tab.25 - Part to be assembled
SIAE code

Description

P20032

Amphenol kit RJ45 shielded full outdoor connector

M02472

Data cable CAT5e for outdoor

MN.00273.E - 004

View

103

SIAE code

Description

M05184

Indoor RJ45 boot protection black


F=6mm

P03192

Indoor RJ45 unshielded plug

P20051

Outdoor RJ45 shielded

View

1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet cables and connectors


Please be aware that modifying Ethernet cables improperly may cause loss of network connectivity. Please
follow colours of wiring.

Fig.44 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable

104

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.45 - RJ-45 Pinout

Fig.46 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly

LAN Cable connector - P20032 - Assembly procedure for RJ sealed connectors


Procedure to be used for terminating and assembling of Amphenol Connector Kit

Fig.47

Step 1
Feed CAT cable through boot and connector housing as shown below.

MN.00273.E - 004

105

Warning: Care should be taken not to damage the rubber sealing gasket inside the rear of the connector

housing.

Fig.48

Step 2
Terminate RJ-45 connector onto CAT cable

Strip jacketing and shield as shown

Fold shield back onto jacketing. Wrap grain wire


one and a half times around the shield. Trim excess length from drain wire

Untwist pairs and arrange to desired order.


Note: it is recommended to follow TIA-568 specifications for wiring orientation
Trim conductors at an angle and insert into the
loading bar

Trim excess wire from holder


Insert prepared cable into RJ-45 Plug

106

MN.00273.E - 004

Bend strain relief to lay along cable

Crimp plug and strain relief

Fig.49

MN.00273.E - 004

107

ALIGN THE KEYS AND


PUSH

KEY ODU CONNECTOR

Fig.50 - Cable connector keys

Step 3
Insert terminated RJ-45 plug into connector housing.
While holding the connector body, pull cable through connector housing until RJ plus is near to the housing.
Align the plug latch with the connector housing keyway.
Depress Plug latch and completely insert the RJ plug into the housing.

108

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.51 -

Step 4
Attach and tighten sealing boot using a 19mm wrench.
Recommended tightening torque is 5.5 to 6.0 (in-lbs) or 0.62 to 0.68 (N-m)

Fig.52

MN.00273.E - 004

109

Fig.53 - PO0032

110

MN.00273.E - 004

OK

NO

Fig.54 - Connector positions


Warning: Tighten all unused connectors with the appropriate cover.

MN.00273.E - 004

111

Tighten strongly LAN


connectors by hands
to ensure the
complete isolaon

P04185 (connector M12 female 5p shelded)

Outdoor LAN connector


(LAN1-LAN2) P20032

Cable M10154 (Outdoor power supply


cable 2x0.75mmq)

Fig.55

8.11.3

112

Optical connector

Cable characteristics

see Tab.26 and Fig.59, Fig.60, Fig.61

Operating temperature range

-40 C to +85C

Protection class

IP67

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.26 - List of Amphenol optical cable


Connector End/End

Length (m)

Type Mode

SIAE Code

SFP LC/LC

100

Single Mode

P20046

SFP LC/LC

50

Single Mode

P20045

SFP LC/LC

25

Single Mode

P20044

SFP LC/LC

2.5

Single Mode

P20053

SFP LC/OPEN END

2.5

Single Mode

P20043

SFP LC/SFP LC

2.5

Single Mode

P20047

SFP LC/LC

100

Multi Mode

P20037

SFP LC/LC

75

Multi Mode

P20050

SFP LC/LC

50

Multi Mode

P20036

SFP LC/LC

35

Multi Mode

P20049

SFP LC/LC

25

Multi Mode

P20035

SFP LC/LC

15

Multi Mode

P20048

SFP LC/LC

2.5

Multi Mode

P20052

SFP LC/OPEN END

2.5

Multi Mode

P20034

SFP LC/SFP LC

2.5

Multi Mode

P20038

8.11.4

Optical SFP mounting procedure

Follow the instructions:

plug the SFP module into LC embedded connectors until Click (see Fig.62)

insert plugged SFP on ALFOplus optical cage (see Fig.63)

lock the connector by turning the nut (see Fig.64).

8.11.5

Optical SFP unmounting procedure

Follow the instructions:

unlock the connector by untightening the nut

eject SFP module from ALFOplus Optical cage

to unplug thr SFP from LC connector, push the locking by keeping a finger below the SFP module
(see Fig.65).

MN.00273.E - 004

113

Fig.56 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only

114

MN.00273.E - 004

2-3
2-2
2-1

8 RED
1-2
1-3
3-A1
3-A3

WHITE/BROWN
WHITE/GREEN
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE
ORANGE
WHITE/ORANGE
GREEN
BROWN

4 BLACK
3-A2
1-5

2-5

2-4

COLOURS

TO

FROM

COURSE

F03594

THERMOFIT
PIPE

THERMOFIT
PIPE

THERMOFIT
PIPE

THERMOFIT
PIPE

4
BLACK

V+

V-

RED

A1

A2

A3

Fig.57 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)

MN.00273.E - 004

115

WIRES CONNECTION
SIDE ENLARGED VIEW

Part
Ref.

*1

WHITE/BLUE

BLUE

CF1-3

CF1-4

CF1-5

TO

CM2-3

CM2-4

CM2-5

FROM

COURSE

WHITE/ORANGE + ORANGE

CF1-2

CM2-2

COLOURS

WHITE/GREEN

WHITE/BROWN+ BROWN

CF1-1

CM2-1

Part
Ref.

N.B. - PART MUST BE LABELLED WITH HOT TIGHTENING RING, DISPLAYING:


- PART NUMBER/REVISION;
- MANUFACTURER ID (REG. MARK OR INITIAL);
- MANUFACTURING DATE (WEEK/YEAR);
- ELECTRICAL TEST PROVEN ("TE" MARK).

CM2

*3 RED

TO

*2 BLACK

COURSE

FROM

CF1-5

CF1-4

35

NOTES

06 mm (Green)

0,6 mm (Blue)

N.B.1

N.B.1

60
4

N.B.2

N.B.2

5
3

BLACK

RED

N.B.2

WIRES CONNECTION
SIDE ENLARGED VIEW

N.B.1 - STRIP THE CABLE RESPECTING THE DIMENSION SHOW IN THE DRAWING
N.B.2 - CABLE HEAT SHRINKABLE

F -----

see N.B.

+20
0 - GET VALUE FROM LAST DIGITS OF PART DESCRIPTION

1530

CF1

Fig.58 - ALFOplus connectors

Fig.59 - SFP LC/LC

Fig.60 - SFP LC/OPEN END

116

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.61 - SFP LC/ SFP LC

Fig.62 - LC connector

Fig.63 - SFP into ALFOplus

MN.00273.E - 004

117

Fig.64 - Locked connection

Fig.65 - Unplug SFP

118

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 4.
LINE-UP

LINE-UP OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM

9.1

GENERAL

The line-up consists of the following steps:

switch on the equipment

alarm leds check

optimizing antenna orientation

insertion into telecontrol and reachability of far-end terminal

check of Ethernet connections

quality evaluation with performance monitoring

Operations involving the use of SCT/WebLCT are roughly described here. For further details please refer
to software manual.

9.2

SWITCH ON

Checks to be performed before switching on the unit are:

check external power supply voltage

antenna presence - check the connection between ODU output flange and antenna.

If everything is correct, switch on the ODU.

MN.00273.E - 004

119

9.3

ALARM LED CHECK

On the rear panel of ODU unit there is a transparent plastic window to see the status of an internal LED
dedicated to show unit alarms. Further information about ALFOplus alarms can be found onto the chapter
ALFOplus alarms and troubleshooting.
Colours status:

Red light
-

ON An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting

Flashing An external alarm is active.

Green light
-

Flashing No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and
properly oriented, it is necessary to check frequency, attenuation and link identifier (see parag.
First configuration.....) and to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software

ON the radio connection with remote ODU is active.

9.4

CONNECTION PROCEDURE

Connection between PC and ALFOplus can be made directly or through a switch. Connect the PC to ALFOplus in LAN2 connector and start the communication toward the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT
program.

First connection (you know IP address)


1. with SCT or browser (internet explorer) type IP address stored previously (Factory Default are
172.20.254.14 ODU L and 172.20.255.15 ODU H)
-

User: system

Password: siaemicr

2. after connection its possible to modify IP address, etc.....

Rescue connection (you dont know IP address)


1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.66) to PC (the IP must belong to the rescue network)
ALFOplus rescue IP address: 173.20.253.13
ALFOplus rescue subnetwork mask: 255.255.0.0
2. Connect your PC directly to ALFOplus with a LAN direct cable
3. By SCT, connect using Local Area Network, press connect button, type in equipment IP address
172.20.253.13 user: System, Password: siaemicr and press RESCUE button (see Fig.67)
4. Follow the instructions of rescue login (see Fig.68)
5. In Rescue Connection mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.

120

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.66 - IP address setting

Fig.67 - Local area connection

MN.00273.E - 004

121

Fig.68 - Rescue login

9.5

FIRST CONFIGURATION

To activate a radio link it is necessary to program the ODU (local and remote side) in some basic items
listed in the following:

modulation & capacity

Tx frequency & power

port configuration

agent IP address and equipment ID

store routing table

remote element list

restart equipment

Bandwidth and Modulation setting


See Fig.69.
Into WebLCT at position:

Equipment menu

Equipment - BW & MOD/LINK ID

In Capacity and Modulation card, you can select Bandwidth&Modulation desired. Press Apply
and Confirm

Enable or disable ACM Engine, if you want dynamic modulation. Press Apply and Confirm

Attention: Use the same parameters on remote unit.

122

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.69 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID

Tx frequency setting
See Fig.70. Into WebLCT at position:

Equipment menu

Radio Branch

Settings card: in this card you have to select Duplex frequency and Tx frequency; Rx frequency
value is shown in the top status bar and is set automatically. Press Apply and Confirm.

Tx frequency to be set at remote radio is equal to local Rx frequency. Please set the frequency according
to your license.
Attention: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs chosen for local and remote side have
equal sub-band and different Tx module (example of permissible pair ODU 1H and ODU 1L).

Tx power setting
See Fig.70. Into WebLCT at position:

Equipment menu

Radio Branch

Powers card: in this card you have to set maximum Tx power; in this card it is possible to enable
automatic transmission and set ATPC thresholds: Rx Level Min, Rx Level Max. Press Apply and Confirm.

Attention: Use the same parameters at remote ODU.

MN.00273.E - 004

123

Fig.70 - Frequency and power setting

Port configuration setting


See Fig.71.
Into WebLCT at position:

124

Equipment menu

Main - Port configuration

In Ethernet card you can modify the IP address, netmask and supervisioning parameters. Press
Apply and Confirm. Press Store and Confirm.

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.71 - Port configuration

Agent IP address setting


See Fig.72.
Into WebLCT at position:

Equipment menu

Main - Equipment properties

In General Info card, change the equipment ID and agent IP address equal to Ethernet IP address. Press Apply and Confirm.

Fig.72 - Equipment properties

MN.00273.E - 004

125

Remote element list setting


See Fig.73.
Into WebLCT at right position:

Press the button to expand Remote Element List window

Clear and Apply new list

Add station, type SIAE LINK and press OK

Select the station just created and add local element:


-

IP address: type local radio IP address

type of element: managed by SCT

Press OK, Apply and Confirm.

Add remote element:


-

IP address: type remote radio IP address

Type of element: Remote link

Press OK, Apply and Confirm.

Restart equipment
See Fig.73.
Into WebLCT at position:

Equipment menu

Main - Equipment properties

Press the button Restart Equipment and Confirm.

Fig.73 - Remote element list

126

MN.00273.E - 004

9.6

OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT

When the whole radio link is on, antenna alignment can be optimised. Antenna alignment optimization is
performed depending on the Rx signal power at local and remote equipment and evaluating both local and
remote S/N value maximizing them.
There are two possibilities to see the Rx signal power level:

through WebLCT interface

through a voltmeter connected to Auxiliary connector on the ODU (F03608 cable - see Fig.57).

In order to get the Rx signal power level by means of software, connect the PC to serial input of ALFOplus
(LAN2) and start the communication towards the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT supervisory program.
Into WebLCT is shown in the top status bar (Rx1A=-value dBm) see Fig.73.
If youre using a voltmeter the Rx signal power level is available on the auxiliary connector of ODU, the
measurement can be performed with a proper cable (see Fig.57).
Following this last procedure, the voltage youre reading with the voltmeter is proportional to Rx power
level, refer to Tab.27.
Tab.27 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port
Received Signal (dBm)

Signal Output (V)

Error (dB)

-20

4.68

-30

3.51

-40

2.34

-50

1.17

-60

-70

-1.17

-80

-2.34

-90

-3.51

-100

-4.68

Formula

RSSI=Offset + (Signal/Output)/Slope

Slope (V/dB)

0.117

Offset (dBm)

-60

Typical Rx signal power level: -40dBm. It is the most important item to optimise the antenna alignment,
but in a situation of interference Rx level can be good, BER acceptable but BER margin low. This means
that when Rx fields will decrease then BER will increase fast. The situation can be easily shown with SCT/
WebLCT software looking at Signal Quality level.
Into WebLCT Software select:

Equipment menu

Maintenance

S/N Meas. card (see Fig.75)

Refer to the ALFOplus operator manual for parameter evaluation.

MN.00273.E - 004

127

Fig.74 - Main menu with Rx signal power level

Fig.75 - S/N measurement monitoring

Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:
-

horizontal

15 operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.76, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.77.

vertical

15 operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.76


only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76
For adjustment from 0 to +30 extract nut (1) Fig.77 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.77 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76.
For adjustment from 0 to 30 extract nut (1) of Fig.77 and position it in hole
(3), extract nut (2) of Fig.77 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical
adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.77
and (4) of Fig.76.

For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10, are available on support. The bigger marker gives 0
starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1),
(2), (11) of Fig.77 and (4) of Fig.76 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.77
for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.

128

MN.00273.E - 004

grounding

The grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and
flat washers as shown.

4
5

Fig.76 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment

MN.00273.E - 004

129

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

11

10
9
5

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
Fig.77 - Antenna aiming block

9.7

ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT

Local ALFOplus ODU and its remote ODU can be accessed at LAN2 or LAN1 ports (depending on supervisioning parameters). Once the radio link has been configured, connect to the local ODU and specify the
network password too. SCT/WebLCT window shows also a field referred to the remote ODU:

double click on this field -> remote ODU is opened in monitor mode

if its necessary to act on remote ODU you have to login on remote ODU (IP address is known because you can read it from monitor windows).

If the remote element list has been done correctly, into WebLCT software press button Open Far End to
open and manage the Remote Radio window.

130

MN.00273.E - 004

9.8

COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC

9.8.1

Ethernet connection stability

Settings
To verify the Ethernet performances set the equipment following Tab.28
Tab.28 - Ethernet connection stability

LAN1

LAN2

Interface type

Electrical

Electrical

Rate Control

Full Rate

Full Rate

Flow Control

Disable

Disable

Master/Slave

Master

M/S Autoneg.

LAN2

Electrical

Electrical

Port Enable

Full Rate

Full Rate

Port Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Master

Master

Master

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

MAC learning

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Speed/Duplex

Auto (1Gbit)

Auto
(100Mbit)

Auto (1Gbit)

Auto
(100Mbit)

Cable crossover

Auto

Auto

Auto

Auto

LAN1

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

LAN2

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Port A

Enable

Enable

Enable

Enable

802.1 Management

Fallback

Disable

Fallback

Fallback

Disable

Fallback

Default Vid

101

102

111

101

102

111

Port default

Port default

Port default

Port default

Priority 802.1P

Ethernet Switch

Remote terminal
LAN1

Port Based VLAN

Vitual Lan (802.1Q)

Lan Setting

Local Terminal
PORT A

Disable

Max Packet size

2048 byte

Mac address
aging time

300 sec

QinQ ETH Type

9100

Priority
Radio to Lan
Priority
LAN to radio

MN.00273.E - 004

PORT A

Disable

Native 802.1p

Native 802.1p

131

9.9

FIRMWARE

The releases of ALFO firmware, downloadable by the operator, are listed in Fig.78.
Using SCT/WebLCT Software open Main menu, select Software info & Maintenance and in the window
shown in Fig.78 select Equipment Firmware and Download SW Setup.
Downloading time depends on connection used between PC and ALFOplus.
Further informations can be found on software manual of ALFOplus equipment.

Fig.78 - Software download procedure

Fig.79 - Upgrade software

132

MN.00273.E - 004

9.10

BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS

9.10.1

Scope

This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.

9.10.2

Configuration upload and download using SCT

Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed.
2. Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will be displayed.
3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window.
5. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window.
6. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word done showing the procedure success.
7. Press OK to finish.

Configuration download
Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceed
as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard
window will be displayed.
2. Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configuration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed.
3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download Configuration
File window will be displayed.
4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word done indicates that download has been successfully.
5. Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.

MN.00273.E - 004

133

9.10.3

Configuration upload and download using WEBLCT

Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. in the field Backup File name write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in
the PC, complete with the full path of its folder
3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the Operation Status field.

Configuration download
Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceed
as follow:
1. Select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. In the field Restore file name write the name of the configuration file you are going to download
in the ODU, complete with the full path of its folder
3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the operation Status field. During
Restore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this configuration at the end of the restore pushing Revert (see Fig.80)
Warning: the file full backup, making use of SCT, isnt compatible with WebLCT and vice versa.

Fig.80 - Backup/Restore configuration

134

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 5.
MAINTENANCE

10

ALFOPLUS ALARMS AND LOOPS

10.1

GENERAL

A radio link generating alarm requires troubleshooting.


The troubleshooting of the ALFOplus can be organized on the basis of alarms.
Basic alarms come from LEDs on the equipment and all the active alarms can be observed through SCT/
WebLCT.
In this document is present ALFOplus alarm list and a description of the loop facilities provided into the
equipment.

10.2

ALARMS

Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software.

10.2.1

Alarm indications

On the rack of the ALFOplus there is a LED that shows the alarm status.
The information provided is:

Red light
-

ON An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.

Flashing An external alarm is active.

Green light

MN.00273.E - 004

135

Flashing No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and
properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the Alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.

ON Radio connection with remote ODU is active.

10.2.2

SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms

All the alarms are displayed through SCT/WebLCT program running on a PC. Alarms are divided in groups
to refer to a particular functionality and are characterized by programmable severity.
Alarms, with group and a short description, are listed into Tab.29.
In the following you can find a class list and the item they describe:

COMMON Failure or status relevant to whole equipment

ETH LAN - Failure on Ethernet traffic

P.M. ACM - Performance monitoring on ACM

P.M. G.828 Performance monitoring on signal quality

P.M. Rx Power Performance monitoring on received signal

P.M. Tx Power Performance monitoring on transmitted signal

Plug-in module - Alarm on plug-in device

RADIO - Alarm on Tx/Rx section of ALFOplus

SETS - Synchronisation alarm or status

SNTP - Server lost (unavailable in this SW version)

Unit - Hardware or software unit alarm


Tab.29 - Alarms
Group

COMMON

ETH LAN

P.M. ACM

136

WebLCT name

Description

Equip Rmon Alarm

Statistic Counter Ethernet

Equip Manual Operation

At least one manual operation on

G.8032 Port operating Status Alarm

Ring protection link alarm

OAM FM Fail Alarm

MEP not receiving

OAM FM MEP Configuration Mismatch


Alarm

MEP not configured properly

Eth Lan Phy Lacp Protocol Down

Link aggregation not working

Eth Lan Phy Master Slave Configuration Fault

Autonegotiation GBit Frame configuration


failed

Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Forwarding

Link loss in remote port

Eth Lan Phy Autonegotiation

Autonegotiation failed

Eth Lan Phy Sync

Synchronization not aligned

Eth Lan Phy Link Loss

Loss of Ethernet signal

pm ACM - 24H Alarm


pm ACM - 15H Alarm

ACM measurements on received radio signal

MN.00273.E - 004

pm G828 - 24H SepAlarm


pm G828 - 15M SepAlarm
pm G828 - UAS Alarm
P.M. G.828

pm G828 - 24H Ses Alarm

Quality measurements on radio signal received a

pm G828 - 24H ES Alarm


pm G828 - 15M Ses Alarm
pm G828 - 15M ES Alarm
P.M. Rx Power

P.M. Tx Power

Plug-in module

RADIO

SETS

MN.00273.E - 004

pm RxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm


pm RxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm
pm TxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

Rx Power measurements on radio signal received a.

pm TxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm

Tx Power measurements on radio signal


transmitted a.

Plug-in Los Alarm

Loss of Signal on Module

Plug-in Module Alarm

SFP module is missing

Plug-in Module Mismatch Alarm

Wrong SFP module

Plug-in Status Change

SFP module is active

Radio Config Mismatch Set

Mod/Cap mismatch on radio link

Radio Rx Quality Low Warning

Received signal quality degraded

Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm

Insufficient received signal quality

Radio Rx AGC Fail

Automatic gain Control alarmed

Radio Rt Vco Fail

Voltage Controlled Oscillator failure

Radio Tx Power Alarm

Transmitted power below the fixed threshold

Radio Rx Power Low Alarm

Received power below the fixed threshold

Radio Modulation Fail Alarm

Alarm on radio transmitting side

Radio Demodulation Fail Alarm

Alarm on radio receiving side

Radio Rx Alarm Set

Low received power on radio

Radio Invalid Frequency Alarm Set

Wrong frequency on radio link

Radio Equip Ber Sync Loss Alarm

Bit error rate/Syncloss on received radio signal

Radio Equip Reduced Capacity Alarm

Capacity is reduced respect to the one with


reference modulation

Radio Equip Link Telemetry Fail Alarm

Telemetry failed to radio link missing

Radio Equip Link ID Alarm

Wrong Link ID received

Timing Sync Active Status

Timing Sync is active

Timing Sync Drift Alarm

Selected Synch bad quality

Timing Sync Los Alarm

Selected Synch missing

Timing Generator Holdover Status

Equipment in holdover status

Timing Generator Free Running Status

Equipment in Free Running status

Timing Generator T0 Fail Alarm

T0 synch missing

137

SNTP

Unit

a.

138

Sntp Client Unicast Server Lost

Server is missing

Unit SW Mismatch Alarm

SW mismatch detected on the unit

Unit HW Mismatch Alarm

HW mismatch detected on the unit

Unit Not Responding Alarm

No response from the unit

Unit Missing Alarm

Missing condition on the unit

Unit Fail Alarm

Failure on the unit

Regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours.

MN.00273.E - 004

11

ALFOPLUS MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

11.1

GENERAL

In the following pages are listed all the procedures to follow for ALFOplus maintenance.
When corrective maintenance is necessary, a troubleshooting procedure helps the operator to identify the
failure unit to replace it with a spare one.

11.2

MAINTENANCE

Maintenance consists of two stages:


1. periodical checks to be carried out using SCT/WebLCT
2. corrective maintenance.
Periodical checks serve to detect correct radio performance without the presence of any alarm condition.
Corrective maintenance takes place as soon as one or more alarm conditions are in existence. Operation
sequence to be carried out is shown in Troubleshooting paragraph.

11.2.1

Periodical checks

System routine maintenance consists in a series of routine checks aiming to verify correct operating mode
of an alarmfree system.
These checks are made through SCT/WebLCT program, installed on a PC.
The items to be checked are:

Tx power (i.e., attenuation value in dB vs. nominal value)

Rx field (value measured must comply with that resulting from hop calculation)

S/N (presence of possible interference)

BER (values measured must comply with hop calculations)

How these operations are carried out is specified in Lineup section or, more widely, in ALFOplus software
manual.

MN.00273.E - 004

139

11.2.2

Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)

Corrective maintenance starts as soon as one or more alarm indication become active.
Corrective maintenance purpose is to locate the faulty unit and replace it with spare after having verified
that the cause of faulty is not external to the equipment.
Corrective maintenance does not include malfunction due to a wrong or incomplete configuration of the
system or to failure due to alarm indication system itself or any other cause external to the system, i.e.:
cabling damage, main voltage loss, antenna misalignment and propagation problems.
See paragraph 11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING for details.

11.3

TROUBLESHOOTING

Main purpose of troubleshooting is to declare an unit faulty or not.


After this step alarms are caused by bad configuration and/or external causes.

11.3.1

Faulty condition detection

Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software:

Unit LEDs
Near the circular connector of the ODU its shown the status of a LED, which can be green or red. The information provided are:

Red light
-

ON An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.

Flashing An external alarm is active.

Green light
-

Flashing No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and
properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.

ON Radio connection with remote ODU is active.

SCT/WebLCT
Alarms are divided in classes to refer to a particular hardware or software functionality and are characterized by their programmable gravity.
A window with alarm classes list is available for local ODU (the unit PC is physically connected to) and for
remote ODU.
The presence of a current alarm is pointed out by SCT/WebLCT program, see software manual.
The presence of an historical alarm is pointed out in the event log window of SCT/WebLCT program (see
Fig.81 and Fig.82).

140

MN.00273.E - 004

11.3.2

Troubleshooting of a faulty unit

Into SCT/WebLCT software, in Equipment menu select View Current Alarm menu.
In this window they are displayed the current alarm and their severity. Depending on which alarm classes
are active, following situation can arise.

ODU alarm classes active


ALFOplus is made up by a single unit, the ODU. This is the minimum spare part.
If one or more of the following conditions occur, the ODU is faulty:

One or more alarms inside the ODU hardware class are active

One or more alarms inside ODU link class are active

If the following condition occurs a further investigation is necessary:

Sw config alarm in ODU software class is active


Every log window has to be inspected. In the window are present additional information about Sw
config alarm; if it is impossible to clear through restart, the unit is not able to work properly and
needs to be tested again in SIAE final test department.

Troubleshooting on remote ODU


With SCT/WebLCT program the alarm on the Remote ODU are displayed the same way as for the local one.
The above described troubleshooting can be carried out for the remote ODU too.

Fig.81 - Current alarm monitoring

MN.00273.E - 004

141

Fig.82 - Event log window

142

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND
SUPERVISION

12

PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

12.1

GENERAL

ALFOplus is programmed and supervised using a software tool: SCT/WebLCT. This subject is fully described
in the separated software manual (WebLCT ALFOplus - Software application for the management of ALFOplus equipment).

12.2

SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET

The provided structure for Ethernet traffic defines the management facilities of "ALFOplus" unit.

MN.00273.E - 004

143

Internal port

Ge LAN1
SWD
Switcing Device

Radio side

Ge LAN2

Mgt
Mac
Controller

Rate adapter
(fpga)

Fig.83 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit

12.2.1

General

In general you suppose that the equipment performs the "host" functionality in an Ethernet network and
that supervisory network follows the traffic routing, eventually separated by "VLAN tag". The management
can be:

Disable

the Management by Ge LAN1 cant get access to the controller

Local Access Only

Ge LAN2 may access only to the access only to the local controller.
Supervisory network is not connected to radio side

In-Band

The management can access to the controller if its configured


with VLAN tag

Out-of-Band

Ge LAN2 can access to local controller and supervisory network is


connected to radio side using VLAN stacking function to separate
the traffic

In-band-drop-node

Ge LAN2 can access to local controller and the port is considered as a


node into the supervisory network in-band (with VLAN tag)

The modalities can be enabled/disabled by software to the LAN1 and LAN2 interface.
Supervisory network can be disable selectively line side and radio site.
Local access to the unit must be always guaranteed by "Ge LAN2".

144

MN.00273.E - 004

12.2.2

Configurations

Possible configurations of supervisioning traffic are shown in Tab.30.


Tab.30 - Configurations
LAN1

LAN2

Internal Port
(Radio side)

Description

Disable

LAO

Disable

Lan1 only payload and Lan2 only local management

Disable

OoB

Disable/OoB

Lan1 only payload and Lan2 only management

In-Band

LAO

Disable/IB

Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 only local management

In-Band

Drop/node

Disable/IB

Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 only management

In-Band

In-Band

Disable

Lan1 Vlan mngt+payload and Lan2 Vlan mngt+payload

In-Band

Disable

Disable/IB

Lan1 Vlanmngt+payload and Lan2 disable

12.2.3

"Local Access only" management

This modality allows the access to "ALFOplus" unit only with the local "Ge LAN2" in the easiest possible
way, with frames without " VLAN tag" and therefore with IP domain shared. This modality can be used if
the user is IP addresses owner and so the equipment is inserted into a traffic network level 3 (IP routing).
For this reason, the Security management is defined by the operator using the function (Access Control
List).

Ge LAN2

CPU
Port based vlan
Fig.84 - Local access only

MN.00273.E - 004

145

12.2.4

"VLAN based in-band" management

This procedure allow the access of "ALFOplus" unit by "Ge LAN1" more safely, because the IP domain is
independent of payload traffic through dedicated "VLAN tag" (configurable). This mode can be used when
the user is owner of "VLAN tag" and the equipment is interposed in a level 2 network traffic (switching).
In that case the management routing is obtain to filtering of "VLAN tag".

Ge LAN1

Ge LAN2





CPU

Vlan map filtering


Fig.85 - VLAN based in-band management
To reduce the visibility of the controller to line side (), radio side () and extent supervision network ()
you can enable or disable the paths indicated in filtering "VLAN tag". The path () can be enabled only if
both line ports, are enabled to "In-band" management.
In case of protection configuration through LAG or ELP, the path () cannot be enabled.

12.2.5

"VLAN based In-band" drop node

This particular way allows to introduce the supervision traffic "VLAN based In-band" (mandatory with
"VLAN tag") using "Ge LAN2" obligatorily without "VLAN tag". The line ports are linked together using the
filtering "VLAN tag" (set as tagged the default port "Ge LAN2").

Ge LAN1
Ge LAN2

MGT


 

CPU
Vlan map filtering

Port based vlan

Fig.86 - VLAN based In-band drop node


This mode allows the supervision of outdoor units placed in the same site, but excludes the possibility of
simultaneous monitoring "Out-of-band" in the network.
The insertion direction (on the line and radio side) can be selectively enabling or disabling the paths corresponding ( and ). This mode is not available in the case of interfaces in a secure configuration.

146

MN.00273.E - 004

12.2.6

"Out-of-band" management

This mode allows the access to the local "ALFOplus" unit of frame without "VLAN tag" and the extension of
the supervision network to the remote terminal. The priority of management traffic is obtained with "VLAN
tag".
In remote terminal the payload and management traffic are again divided. This involves increasing the
length of traffic frame of four bytes.

Fe LAN2

Fe LAN2

CPU

CPU
Vlan map filtering

Port based vlan

Fig.87 - Out-of-band management

12.2.7

Configurability

The management mode of equipment affects the Ethernet Channel and on the Switch configuration (RSTP,
OAM, ). Therefore it is important to decide the optimal configuration of traffic Ethernet and management,
to avoid blocking traffic conditions.

12.2.8

Address

The unit uses a single IP address associated at the management port of controller and a single "default
gateway". Depending on the configuration of these addresses are visible from supervision "in-band" and
"Out-of-band".

12.2.9

Restore supervisioning access mode

The RESTORE OF CPU ACCESS command is available through Serial port (F03594 cable) via Hyperterminal (115200bps,n,8,1):

Login

SYSTEM

Password

SIAEMICR

Type string:

lao

This string restores the factory default of port configuration:

LAN1

disable

LAN2

local access only

MN.00273.E - 004

147

148

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 7.
COMPOSITION

13

COMPOSITION

13.1

GENERALS

This document shows ALFOplus system available versions with the relevant main specifications and characteristics.

13.2

ALFOPLUS SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL

Different versions are identified by a label. This label contains the main characteristics of the equipment
(see Tab.31).

13.3

AVAILABLE ALFOPLUS VERSIONS

In Tab.31 you find the available versions with following information:

Code

ODU frequency

Go-return

RF Subband (L and H)

MN.00273.E - 004

149

Tab.31 - RF band and RF filter band

150

Code

Description

Go-return (MHz)

RF/Subband

GB 8606

ODU ALFOplus 11

490/530

11 GHz 1L

GB 8607

ODU ALFOplus 11

490/530

11 GHz 1H

GB 8608

ODU ALFOplus 11

490/530

11 GHz 2L

GB 8609

ODU ALFOplus 11

490/530

11 GHz 2H

GB 8610

ODU ALFOplus 11

490/530

11 GHz 3L

GB 8611

ODU ALFOplus 11

490/530

11 GHz 3H

GB 8612

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 1L

GB 8613

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 1H

GB 8614

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 2L

GB 8615

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 2H

GB 8616

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 3L

GB 8617

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 3H

GB 8618

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 4L

GB 8619

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 4H

GB 8628

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 1L

GB 8629

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 1H

GB 8630

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 2L

GB 8631

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 2H

GB 8632

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 3L

GB 8633

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 3H

GB 8634

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 4L

GB 8635

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 4H

GB 8636

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 5L

GB 8637

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 5H

GB 8646

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 1L

GB 8647

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 1H

GB 8648

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 2L

GB 8649

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 2H

GB 8650

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 3L

GB 8651

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 3H

GB 8652

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 4L

GB 8653

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 4H

GB 8662

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 1L

GB 8663

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 1H

GB 8664

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 2L

GB 8665

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 2H

MN.00273.E - 004

GB 8666

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 3L

GB 8667

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 3H

GB 8668

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 4L

GB 8669

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 4H

GB 8690

ODU ALFOplus 15

728

15 GHz 1L

GB 8691

ODU ALFOplus 15

728

15 GHz 1H

GB 8700

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 1L

GB 8701

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 1H

GB 8702

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 2L

GB 8703

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 2H

GB 8704

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 3L

GB 8705

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 3H

GB 8716

ODU ALFOplus 18

1560

18 GHz 1L

GB 8717

ODU ALFOplus 18

1560

18 GHz 1H

GB 8718

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 1L

GB 8719

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 1H

GB 8720

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 2L

GB 8721

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 2H

GB 8726

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 1L

GB 8727

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 1H

GB 8728

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 2L

GB 8729

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 2H

GB 8730

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 3L

GB 8731

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 3H

GB 8736

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 1L

GB 8737

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 1H

GB 8738

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 2L

GB 8739

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 2H

GB 8782

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 1L

GB 8783

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 1H

GB 8784

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 2L

GB 8785

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 2H

GB 9524

ODU ALFOplus 7L

196

7L GHz 1L

GB 9525

ODU ALFOplus 7L

196

7L GHz 1H

GB 9526

ODU ALFOplus 7L

196

7L GHz 2L

GB 9527

ODU ALFOplus 7L

196

7L GHz 2H

GB 9528

ODU ALFOplus 7L

196

7L GHz 3L

GB 9529

ODU ALFOplus 7L

196

7L GHz 3H

MN.00273.E - 004

151

152

GB 9534

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 1L

GB 9535

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 1H

GB 9536

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 2L

GB 9537

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 2H

GB 9538

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 3L

GB 9539

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 3H

GB 9540

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 4L

GB 9541

ODU ALFOplus 7M

154

7M GHz 4H

GB 9550

ODU ALFOplus 7M

168

7M GHz 1L

GB 9551

ODU ALFOplus 7M

168

7M GHz 1H

GB 9552

ODU ALFOplus 7M

168

7M GHz 2L

GB 9553

ODU ALFOplus 7M

168

7M GHz 2H

GB 9554

ODU ALFOplus 7M

168

7M GHz 3L

GB 9555

ODU ALFOplus 7M

168

7M GHz 3H

GB 9612

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 1L

GB 9613

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 1H

GB 9614

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 2L

GB 9615

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 2H

GB 9616

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 3L

GB 9617

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 3H

GB 9618

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 4L

GB 9619

ODU ALFOplus 13

266

13 GHz 4H

GB 9628

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 1L

GB 9629

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 1H

GB 9630

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 2L

GB 9631

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 2H

GB 9632

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 3L

GB 9633

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 3H

GB 9634

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 4L

GB 9635

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 4H

GB 9636

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 5L

GB 9637

ODU ALFOplus 15

315/322

15 GHz 5H

GB 9646

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 1L

GB 9647

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 1H

GB 9648

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 2L

GB 9649

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 2H

GB 9650

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 3L

GB 9651

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 3H

MN.00273.E - 004

GB 9652

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 4L

GB 9653

ODU ALFOplus 15

420

15 GHz 4H

GB 9662

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 1L

GB 9663

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 1H

GB 9664

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 2L

GB 9665

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 2H

GB 9666

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 3L

GB 9667

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 3H

GB 9668

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 4L

GB 9669

ODU ALFOplus 15

490

15 GHz 4H

GB 9690

ODU ALFOplus 15

728

15 GHz 1L

GB 9691

ODU ALFOplus 15

728

15 GHz 1H

GB 9700

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 1L

GB 9701

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 1H

GB 9702

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 2L

GB 9703

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 2H

GB 9704

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 3L

GB 9705

ODU ALFOplus 18

1010

18 GHz 3H

GB 9708

ODU ALFOplus 17

144

17 GHz 1L

GB 9709

ODU ALFOplus 17

144

17 GHz 1H

GB 9716

ODU ALFOplus 18

1560

18 GHz 1L

GB 9717

ODU ALFOplus 18

1560

18 GHz 1H

GB 9718

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 1L

GB 9719

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 1H

GB 9720

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 2L

GB 9721

ODU ALFOplus 23

1008

23 GHz 2H

GB 9726

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 1L

GB 9727

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 1H

GB 9728

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 2L

GB 9729

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 2H

GB 9730

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 3L

GB 9731

ODU ALFOplus 23

1200/1232

23 GHz 3H

GB 9736

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 1L

GB 9737

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 1H

GB 9738

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 2L

GB 9739

ODU ALFOplus 25

1008

25 GHz 2H

GB 9782

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 1L

GB 9783

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 1H

MN.00273.E - 004

153

GB 9784

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 2L

GB 9785

ODU ALFOplus 38

1260

38 GHz 2H

GB 9790

ODU ALFOplus 42

1500

42 GHz 1L

GB 9791

ODU ALFOplus 42

1500

42 GHz 1H

GB 9792

ODU ALFOplus 42

1500

42 GHz 2L

GB 9793

ODU ALFOplus 42

1500

42 GHz 2H

GB 9794

ODU ALFOplus 42

1500

42 GHz 3L

GB 9795

ODU ALFOplus 42

1500

42 GHz 3H

13.4

ODU INSTALLATION KIT

The ALFOplus system installation kit is concerning pole mounting of ODU according with the operating frequency, dimensions and presence of the centring ring.
-

V32308

for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz

The following installation kit is supplied with the equipment.

1+0 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

centring ring and relevant screws

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection.

Required tools for mounting (not supplied):

154

N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

N.1 13 mm spanner

N.2 17 mm spanner.

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 8.
ADDENDUM

14

INTRODUCTION

14.1

GENERALS

This document describes technical specifications (international standards, frequency range, bandwidth,
power, sensitivities, ....) for all available frequencies of ALFOPlus system.

MN.00273.E - 004

155

15

ALFOPLUS 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

15.1

FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

ITU-R F.387-10 and CEPT T/R 12-06 for RF channel arrangement

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3)

EN 60950-22 for Safety

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

15.2

GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

15.2.1
-

Available frequencies

Frequency band

see Tab.32
Tab.32 - Frequency band

156

Frequency range
(MHz)

Duplex spacing
(MHz)

Reference
recommendation

10700 - 11700

530

CEPT T/R 12-06


ITU-R F.387-10

10700 - 11700

490

CEPT T/R 12-06


ITU-R F.387-10
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

10700 - 11705

500

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

Modulation scheme

4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

Capacity

see Tab.33

MN.00273.E - 004

RF filter range

Wide Filter Option see Tab.34

Transceiver tuning range

see Tab.34

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.35 and Tab.36.


Tab.33 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth (MHz)

Modulation
Type

10

14

28

30

40

56

4QAMs

9.295

11.408

16.393

32.956

35.117

46.462

65.912

4QAM

10.872

15.328

22.025

44.279

47.183

62.426

88.558

16QAMs

16.225

22.875

32.870

66.081

70.414

93.163

132.161

16QAM

21.080

29.720

42.705

85.854

91.484

121.040

171.708

32QAM

24.483

34.517

49.599

99.713

106.251

140.578

199.425

64QAM

30.293

42.707

61.368

123.373

131.463

173.936

246.746

128QAM

36.102

50.898

73.137

147.034

156.675

207.294

294.068

256QAM

41.912

59.088

84.906

170.694

181.887

240.651

341.389

512QAM

47.763

67.279

96.759

194.524

207.100

274.009

389.048

1024QAM

53.572

75.469

108.529

218.185

232.312

307.336

436.369

Tab.34 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz


FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz
CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - f0=11200 MHz
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

10715 - 10895

11205 - 11385

10875 - 11055

11365 - 11545

11035 - 11215

11525 - 11705

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

180

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz


CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - f0=11200 MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

10695 - 10875

11225 - 11405

10855 - 11035

11385 - 11565

11015 - 11195

11545 - 11725

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

180

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 500 MHz


FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

10700 - 10730

11200 - 11230

11170 - 11200

11670 - 11700

MN.00273.E - 004

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]
30

157

Tab.35 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10- GO-RETURN: 490 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10718.5

10891.5

11208.5

11381.5

14

10722

10888

11212

11378

28

10729

10881

11219

11371

40

10735

10875

11225

11365

56

10743

10867

11233

11357

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10878.5

11051.5

11368.5

11541.5

14

10882

11048

11372

11538

28

10889

11041

11379

11531

40

10895

11035

11385

11525

56

10903

11027

11393

11517

SUB BAND 3

158

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

11038.5

11211.5

11528.5

11701.5

14

11042

11208

11532

11698

28

11049

11201

11539

11691

40

11055

11195

11545

11685

56

11063

11187

11553

11677

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.36 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10698.5

10871.5

11228.5

11401.5

14

10702

10868

11232

11398

28

10709

10861

11239

11391

40

10715

10855

11245

11385

56

10723

10847

11253

11377

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10858.5

11031.5

11388.5

11561.5

14

10862

11028

11392

11558

28

10869

11021

11399

11551

40

10875

11015

11405

11545

56

10883

11007

11413

11537

SUB BAND 3
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

11018.5

11191.5

11548.5

11721.5

14

11022

11188

11552

11718

28

11029

11181

11559

11711

40

11035

11175

11565

11705

56

11043

11167

11573

11697

Tab.37 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 490 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

10720

10890

11210

11380

30

10730

10880

11220

11370

MN.00273.E - 004

159

40

10740

10875

11225

11365

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

11880

11050

11370

11540

30

11890

11040

11380

11530

40

11895

11035

11385

11525

SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

11040

11210

11530

11700

30

11050

11200

11540

11690

40

11055

11195

11545

11685

Tab.38 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 500 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 500 MHz - 30 MHz RF filter tuning range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

10705

10725

11205

11225

30

10715

10715

11215

11215

40

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

160

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

11175

11195

11675

11695

30

11185

11185

11685

11685

40

MN.00273.E - 004

15.2.2
-

Transmitter characteristics

Maximum transmit power

see Tab.39
Tab.39 - Maximum transmit power

MODULATION

Nominal Output Power


[dBm]

Guaranteed Output
Power [dBm]

4QAMs

27

25

4QAM

27

25

16QAMs

24

22

16QAM

24

22

32QAM

23

21

64QAM

23

21

128QAM

23

21

256QAM

23

21

512QAM

23

21

1024QAM

22

20

Nominal Power
Tolerance

2 dB

Transmit power with ACM

Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM


profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.

Tx bandwidth

see Tab.34

Frequency agility

following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz


steps

Built-in transmit power attenuation range

20 dB

Attenuation Step

1 dB step

RTPC attenuation range

20 dB

Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation

2 dB

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range

20 dB

ATPC Attenuation Step

1 dB

Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

RF frequency stability

5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)

Muting attenuation

60 dB

MN.00273.E - 004

161

15.2.3

Receiver characteristics

Receiver bandwidth

See Table 2

Noise Figure

6.5 dB

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

see Tab.40

Tab.40 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

ENBW [MHz]

6.1

10

8.6

14

12.2

28

24.4

30

26

40

34.4

56

48.8

Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]

see Tab.41
Tab.41 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

28

30

40

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

7.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

9.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

7.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

9.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

162

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

MN.00273.E - 004

14

28

30

40

56
-

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

Guaranteed receiver sensitivities

[dBm]

see Tab.42
Tab.42

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

28

30

40

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

BER=10-10

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-6

-92.0

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

BER=10-10

-90.0

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

BER=10-6

-92.0

-88.5

-85.5

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-80.0

-78.0

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

BER=10-6

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-75.5

BER=10-10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-10

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10-6

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.0

BER=10-10

-76.0

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.0

BER=10-6

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower

MN.00273.E - 004

163

28

30

40

56

BER=10-6

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-10

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-6

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-59.5

BER=10-10

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

BER=10-6

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

Rx Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

AGC dynamic range

from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication over the


whole temperature range (PC reading)

3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6
4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm

Maximum input level for BER 10-6

-22 dBm

Residual BER (RBER)

10-12

Receiver Dynamic Range (4) [dB]

see Tab.43

Tab.43 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB]


CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

58.0

55.5

52.0

49.0

47.0

44.5

41.0

38.5

35.5

32.0

10

57.0

54.0

50.5

47.5

45.5

43.0

39.5

37.0

34.0

30.0

14

57.0

53.5

50.5

47.0

45.0

42.5

39.0

36.0

33.0

29.0

28

54.0

50.5

47.0

44.0

42.5

39.5

36.5

33.0

30.5

26.5

30

53.5

50.0

46.5

43.5

42.0

39.0

36.0

32.5

30.0

26.0

40

52.5

49.0

45.5

42.5

40.5

38.0

35.0

31.5

29.0

24.5

56

51.0

47.5

44.0

41.0

39.0

36.5

33.5

30.0

27.5

23.0

15.2.4
-

164

Radio flange

Radio WG flange type

UBR 100

Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

MN.00273.E - 004

15.2.5

Power supply and consumption

Operating voltage

48 Vdc 15%

Power consumption

see Tab.44
Tab.44 - Power consumption

15.2.6
-

Typical Power
Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)

35

37

Mechanical characteristics

Physical size of system components

see Tab.45

Tab.45 - Physical size of system components

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

270.4

287.3

154.6

Weight of system components

MN.00273.E - 004

4.3 kg

165

16

ALFOPLUS 13GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

16.1

FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

ITU-R F497 and CEPT Recommendation ERC/REC 12-02 for RF channel arrangement

EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3).

EN 60950-22 for Safety

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

16.2

GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

16.2.1
-

Available frequencies

Frequency band

see Tab.46
Tab.46 - Frequency band
Reference
Recommendation

Frequency Range [GHz] Duplex Spacing [MHz]


12.75 13.25

266

ITU-R F497 CEPT T/R 12-02

Modulation scheme

4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

Capacity

see Tab.47

RF filter range

Wide Filter Option (see Tab.48)

Transceiver tuning range

see Tab.48

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.49.

166

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.47 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Modulation type

Channel bandwidth [MHz]


7

14

28

56

4QAMs

9.295

16.393

32.956

65.912

4QAM

10.872

22.025

44.279

88.558

16QAMs

16.225

32.870

66.081

132.161

16QAM

21.080

42.705

85.854

171.708

32QAM

24.483

49.599

99.713

199.425

64QAM

30.293

61.368

123.373

246.746

128QAM

36.102

73.137

147.034

294.068

256QAM

41.912

84.906

170.694

341.389

512QAM

47.763

96.759

194.524

389.048

1024QAM

53.572

108.529

218.185

436.369

Tab.48 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz


FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHzITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E f0=12996 MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

12751 12835

13017 13101

12835 12919

13101 13185

12891 12975

13157 13241

12779 12863

13045 13129

MN.00273.E - 004

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

84

167

Tab.49 - 12.75 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHz -84 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

12754.5

12831.5

13020.5

13097.5

14

12758

12828

13024

13094

28

12765

12821

13031

13087

56

12779

12807

13045

13073

SUB BAND 2
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

12838.5

12915.5

13104.5

13181.5

14

12842

12912

13108

13178

28

12849

12905

13115

13171

56

12863

12891

13129

13157

SUB BAND 3
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

12894.5

12971.5

13160.5

13237.5

14

12898

12968

13164

13234

28

12905

12961

13171

13227

56

12919

12947

13185

13213

SUB BAND 4
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

168

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

12782.5

12866.5

13048.5

13132.5

14

12786

12870

13052

13136

28

12793

12877

13059

13143

56

12807

12891

13073

13157

MN.00273.E - 004

16.2.2
-

Transmitter characteristics

Maximum transmit power

see Tab.50
Tab.50 - Maximum transmit power

MODULATION

Nominal Output Power


[dBm]

Guaranteed Output
Power [dBm]

4QAMs

27

25

4QAM

27

25

16QAMs

24

22

16QAM

24

22

32QAM

23

21

64QAM

23

21

128QAM

23

21

256QAM

23

21

512QAM

23

21

1024QAM

22

20

Nominal Power Tolerance

2 dB

Transmit power with ACM

Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM


profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.

Tx bandwidth

see Tab.48

Frequency agility

following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz


steps

Built-in transmit power attenuation range

20 dB

Attenuation Step

1 dB step

RTPC attenuation range

20 dB

Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation

2 dB

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range

20 dB

ATPC Attenuation Step

Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

RF frequency stability

5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)

MN.00273.E - 004

1 dB

169

16.2.3

Receiver characteristics

Receiver bandwidth

See Tab.48

Noise Figure

6.5 dB

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

see Tab.51

Tab.51 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

ENBW [MHz]

6.4

14

12.2

28

24.4

56

48.8

Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]

see Tab.52
Tab.52 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

170

MN.00273.E - 004

Guaranteed receiver sensitivities

[dBm]

see Tab.53

Tab.53 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]


CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]
7

14

28

56

64QAM
7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

BER=10-10

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-6

-92.0

-88.5

-85.5

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-80.0

-78.0

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

128QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-10

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10-6

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-6

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

Rx Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

AGC dynamic range

from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication over the


whole temperature range (PC reading)

3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6
4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm

-6

Maximum input level for BER 10

-22 dBm

Residual BER (RBER)

10-12

Receiver Dynamic Range6 [dB]

see Tab.54

Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower

Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm Threshold @10-6 + 10 dB)

MN.00273.E - 004

171

Tab.54 - Receiver Dynamic Range


CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

4QAMs

4QAM

58.0

55.5

52.0

49.0

47.0

44.5

41.0

38.5

35.5

32.0

14

57.0

53.5

50.5

47.0

45.0

42.5

39.0

36.0

33.0

29.0

28

54.0

50.5

47.0

44.0

42.5

39.5

36.5

33.0

30.5

26.5

56

51.0

47.5

44.0

41.0

39.0

36.5

33.5

30.0

27.5

23.0

16.2.4
-

16QAM
128QA 256QA 512QA 1024QA
16QAM 32QAM 64QAM
s
M
M
M
M

Radio flange

Radio WG flange type

16.2.5

UBR 120

Power supply and consumption

Operating voltage range

48 Vdc 15%

Power consumption

see Tab.55
Tab.55 - Power consumption

16.2.6
-

Typical Power
Consumption [W]

Guaranteed Power
Consumption [W]

37

39

Mechanical characteristics

Physical size of system components

see Tab.56

Tab.56 - Physical size of system components

172

Width [mm]

Height [mm]

Depth [mm]

270.4

287.3

154.6

Weight of system components

4.3 Kg

MN.00273.E - 004

17

ALFOPLUS 15GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

17.1

FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

ITU-R F.636 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-07 for RF channel arrangement

EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3)

EN 60950-22 for Safety

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

17.2

GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

17.2.1
-

Available frequencies

Frequency band

see Tab.57
Tab.57 - Frequency band

MN.00273.E - 004

Frequency range
(MHz)

Duplex spacing
(MHz)

Reference
recommendation

14501 - 15348

420

ITU-R F.636

14403 - 15348

490

ITU-R F.636

14501 - 15348

728

CEPT T/R 12-07

14613 - 15251

322

N.A.

14620 - 15244

315

N.A:

173

Modulation scheme

4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

Capacity

see Tab.57

RF filter range

Wide Filter Option see Tab.58

Transceiver tuning range:

see Tab.58

Frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.59, Tab.60, Tab.61, Tab.62, Tab.63 and Tab.64.
Tab.58 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

174

Channel bandwidth (MHz)

Modulation
Type

14

28

56

4QAMs

9.295

16.393

32.956

65.912

4QAM

10.872

22.025

44.279

88.558

16QAMs

16.225

32.870

66.081

132.161

16QAM

21.080

42.705

85.854

171.708

32QAM

24.483

49.599

99.713

199.425

64QAM

30.293

61.368

123.373

246.746

128QAM

36.102

73.137

147.034

294.068

256QAM

41.912

84.906

170.694

341.389

512QAM

47.763

96.759

194.524

389.048

1024QAM

53.572

108.529

218.185

436.369

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.59 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz


FREQUENCY RANGE:14501 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

14500 - 14620

14920 - 15040

14612 - 14732

15032 - 15152

14724 - 14844

15144 - 15264

14808 - 14928

15228 - 15348

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

120

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

14402 - 14522

14892 - 15012

14514 - 14634

15004 - 15124

14626 - 14746

15116 - 15236

14738 - 14858

15228 - 15348

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

120

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHzCEPT T/R 12-07 - f0=14924MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

14500 - 14620

15228 - 15348

120

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 322 MHz


Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

14613 - 14705

14935 - 15027

14669 - 14761

14991 - 15083

14725 - 14817

15047 - 15139

14781 - 14873

15103 - 15195

14837 - 14929

15159 - 15251

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

92

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 315 MHz


Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

14620 - 14705

14935 - 15020

14676 - 14761

14991 - 15076

14732 - 14817

15047 - 15132

14788 - 14873

15103 - 15188

14844 - 14929

15159 - 15244

MN.00273.E - 004

RF Filter Tuning Range


[MHz]

85

175

Tab.60 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14503.5

14616.5

14923.5

15036.5

14

14507

14613

14927

15033

28

14514

14606

14934

15026

56

14528

14592

14948

15012

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14615.5

14728.5

15035.5

15148.5

14

14619

14725

15039

15145

28

14626

14718

15046

15138

56

14640

14704

15060

15124

SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14727.5

14840.5

15147.5

15260.5

14

14731

14837

15151

15257

28

14738

14830

15158

15250

56

14752

14816

15172

15236

SUB BAND 4

176

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14811.5

14931.5

15231.5

15351.5

14

14815

14935

15235

15355

28

14822

14942

15242

15362

56

14836

14956

15256

15376

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.61 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14405.5

14518.5

14895.5

15008.5

14

14409

14515

14899

15005

28

14416

14508

14906

14998

56

14430

14494

14920

14984

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14517.5

14630.5

15007.5

15120.5

14

14521

14627

15011

15117

28

14528

14620

15018

15110

56

14542

14606

15032

15096

SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14629.5

14742.5

15119.5

15232.5

14

14633

14739

15123

15229

28

14640

14732

15130

15222

56

14654

14718

15144

15208

SUB BAND 4
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14741.5

14861.5

15231.5

15351.5

14

14745

14865

15235

15355

28

14752

14872

15242

15362

56

14766

14886

15256

15376

MN.00273.E - 004

177

Tab.62 - 14501 - 15348 MHz band - Go-Return 728 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

178

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14503.5

14616.5

15231.5

15344.5

14

14507

14613

15235

15341

28

14514

14606

15242

15334

56

14528

14592

15256

15320

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.63 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 322 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 322 MHz - 92 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14616.5

14701.5

14938.5

15023.5

14

14620

14698

14942

15020

28

14627

14691

14949

15013

56

14641

14677

14963

14999

SUB BAND 2
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14672.5

14757.5

14994.5

15079.5

14

14676

14754

14998

15076

28

14683

14747

15005

15069

56

14697

14733

15019

15055

SUB BAND 3
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14728.5

14813.5

15050.5

15135.5

14

14732

14810

15054

15132

28

14739

14803

15061

15125

56

14753

14789

15075

15111

SUB BAND 4
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14784.5

14869.5

15106.5

15191.5

14

14788

14866

15110

15188

28

14795

14859

15117

15181

56

14809

14845

15131

15167

SUB BAND 5
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14840.5

14925.5

15162.5

15247.5

14

14844

14922

15166

15244

28

14851

14915

15173

15237

56

14865

14901

15187

15223

MN.00273.E - 004

179

Tab.64 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 315 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 315 MHz - 85 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14623.5

14701.5

14938.5

15016.5

14

14627

14698

14942

15013

28

14634

14691

14949

15006

56

14648

14677

14963

14992

SUB BAND 2
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14679.5

14757.5

14994.5

15072.5

14

14683

14754

14998

15069

28

14690

14747

15005

15062

56

14704

14733

15019

15048

SUB BAND 3
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14735.5

14813.5

15050.5

15128.5

14

14739

14810

15054

15125

28

14746

14803

15061

15118

56

14760

14789

15075

15104

SUB BAND 4
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14791.5

14869.5

15106.5

15184.5

14

14795

14866

15110

15181

28

14802

14859

15117

15174

56

14816

14845

15131

15160

SUB BAND 5

180

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

14847.5

14925.5

15162.5

15240.5

14

14851

14922

15166

15237

28

14858

14915

15173

15230

56

14872

14901

15187

15216

MN.00273.E - 004

17.2.2
-

Transmitter characteristics

Maximum transmit power

see Tab.65
Tab.65 -Maximum transmit power

MODULATION

Nominal Output Power


[dBm]

Guaranteed Output Power


[dBm]

4QAMs

27

25

4QAM

27

25

16QAMs

24

22

16QAM

24

22

32QAM

23

21

64QAM

23

21

128QAM

23

21

256QAM

23

21

512QAM

23

21

1024QAM

22

20

Nominal Power
Tolerance

2 dB

Transmit power with ACM

Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM


profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode
is followed.

Tx bandwidth

see Tab.58

Frequency agility

Following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz


steps

Built-in transmit power attenuation range

20 dB

Attenuation Step

1 dB step

RTPC attenuation range

20 dB

Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation

2 dB

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range

20 dB

ATPC Attenuation Step

Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

RF frequency stability

5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)

Muting attenuation

60 db

MN.00273.E - 004

1 dB

181

17.2.3

Receiver characteristics

Receiver bandwidth

see Tab.58

Noise Figure

6.5 dB

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

see Tab.66

Tab.66 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

ENBW [MHz]

6.4

14

12.2

28

24.4

56

48.8

Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

see Tab.67
Tab.67 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

182

Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]

see Tab.68

Typical receiver sensitivities is 2dB lower

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.68 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]


CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]
7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

-93.0

-90.5

-87.0

-84.0

-82.0

BER=10-10

-91.0

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-6

-92.0

-88.5

-85.5

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-10

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-80.0

-78.0

BER=10-6

-89.0

-85.5

-82.0

-79.0

-77.5

BER=10-10

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.5

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

-79.5

-76.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

BER=10-10

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

BER=10-6

-77.5

-74.0

-71.0

-68.0

-64.0

BER=10-10

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-6

-74.5

-71.5

-68.0

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

Rx Spurious emissions

According to ETSI EN 301 390

AGC dynamic range

From -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole


temperature range (PC reading)

3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6
4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm

Maximum input level for BER 10-6

-22 dBm

Residual BER (RBER)

10-12

Receiver Dynamic Range (8) (dB)

see Tab.69

Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm threshold @10-6 +10dB)

MN.00273.E - 004

183

Tab.69 - Receiver Dynamic Range


CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

58.0

55.5

52.0

49.0

47.0

44.5

41.0

38.5

35.5

32.0

14

57.0

53.5

50.5

47.0

45.0

42.5

39.0

36.0

33.0

29.0

28

54.0

50.5

47.0

44.0

42.5

39.5

36.5

33.0

30.5

26.5

56

51.0

47.5

44.0

41.0

39.0

36.5

33.5

30.0

27.5

23.0

17.2.4
-

Radio flange

Radio WG flange type

17.2.5

CBR 140

Power supply and consumption

Operating voltage range

48 Vdc 15%

Power consumption

see Tab.70
Tab.70

17.2.6
-

Power consumption

Typical Power
Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)

37

39

Mechanical characteristics

Physical size of system components

see Tab.71

Tab.71 - Physical size of system components

184

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

270.4

287.3

154.6

Weight of system components

4.3 kg

MN.00273.E - 004

18

ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

18.1

FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

CEPT ERC REC 70-03

EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3)

EN 60950-22 for Safety

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

18.2

GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

18.2.1
-

Available frequencies

Frequency band

see Tab.83
Tab.72 - Frequency band

FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]

REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION

17100 17300

95 193

BEPT ERC REC 70-03

Modulation scheme

4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

Capacity

see Tab.84

RF filter range

Wide Filter Option (see Tab.85)

Transceiver tuning range

see Tab.85

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.86 and Tab.87.

MN.00273.E - 004

185

Tab.73 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
MODULATION TYPE

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

4QAMs

9.295

16.393

32.956

65.912

4QAM

10.872

22.025

44.279

88.558

16QAMs

16.225

32.870

66.081

132.161

16QAM

21.080

42.705

85.854

171.708

32QAM

24.483

49.599

99.713

199.425

64QAM

30.293

61.368

123.373

246.746

128QAM

36.102

73.137

147.034

294.068

256QAM

41.912

84.906

170.694

341.389

512QAM

47.763

96.759

194.524

389.048

1024QAM

53.572

108.529

218.185

436.369

Tab.74 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 17GHz


FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 193 MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

RF Filter Range [MHz]

17100 17156

17244 17300

56

Tab.75 - 17100 MHz 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 193 MHz 56 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

186

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

17103.5

17152.5

17247.5

17296.5

14

17107

17149

17251

17293

28

17114

17142

17258

17286

56

17128

17128

17272

17272

MN.00273.E - 004

18.2.2
-

Transmitter characteristics

Maximum transmit power9

see Tab.89
Tab.76 - Maximum transmit power

MODULATION

Nominal Output Power


[dBm]

Guaranteed Output Power


[dBm]

4QAMs

22

20

4QAM

22

20

16QAMs

20

18

16QAM

20

18

32QAM

18

16

64QAM

18

16

128QAM

18

16

256QAM

18

16

512QAM

18

16

1024QAM

17

15

Nominal Power
Tolerance

2 dB

Transmit power with ACM

Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM


profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.

Tx bandwidth

see Tab.85

Frequency agility

following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz


steps

Built-in transmit power attenuation range

20 dB

Attenuation Step

1 dB step

RTPC attenuation range

20 dB

Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation

2 dB

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range

20 dB

ATPC Attenuation Step

Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

RF frequency stability

5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)

Muting attenuation:

60 dB

1 dB

The maximum e.i.r.p. stated in CEPT ERC REC 70 Rec. should be 100mW

MN.00273.E - 004

187

18.2.3

Receiver characteristics

Receiver bandwidth

see Tab.85

Noise Figure

8 dB

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

see Tab.90

Tab.77 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

ENBW [MHz]

6.4

14

12.2

28

24.4

56

48.8

Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

see Tab.91
Tab.78 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

7.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

9.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

Guaranteed receiver sensitivities10 [dBm]

see Tab.92

10 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.

188

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.79 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]


CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]
7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

-91.5

-89.0

-85.5

-82.5

-80.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

BER=10-6

-90.5

-87.0

-83.5

-80.5

-78.5

BER=10-10

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-76.5

BER=10-6

-87.5

-84.0

-80.5

-77.5

-76.0

BER=10-10

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-74.0

BER=10-6

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-72.5

BER=10-10

-82.5

-79.0

-75.5

-72.5

-70.5

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

-78.0

-74.5

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

BER=10-10

-76.0

-72.5

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

BER=10-6

-76.0

-72.5

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-10

-74.0

-70.5

-67.5

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-6

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-10

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-58.0

BER=10-6

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-56.5

BER=10-10

-68.0

-65.0

-61.5

-59.0

-54.5

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

Rx Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

AGC dynamic range

from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole


temperature range (PC reading)

3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6
4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm

Maximum input level for BER 10-6

-22 dBm

Residual BER (RBER)

10-12

Receiver Dynamic Range

11

(dB)

see Tab.93

Tab.80 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)


CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

56.5

54.0

50.5

47.5

45.5

43.0

39.0

37.0

34.0

30.5

14

55.5

52.0

48.5

45.5

43.5

41.0

37.5

34.5

31.5

27.5

28

52.5

49.0

45.5

42.5

41.0

38.0

35.0

31.5

29.0

25.0

56

49.5

46.0

42.5

39.5

37.5

35.0

32.0

28.5

26.0

21.5

11 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

MN.00273.E - 004

189

18.2.4
-

Radio flange

Radio WG flange type

18.2.5

UBR 220

Power supply and consumption

Operating voltage range

48 Vdc 15%

Power consumption

see Tab.94
Tab.81 - Power consumption

18.2.6
-

Typical Power
Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)

37

39

Mechanical characteristics

Physical size of system components

see Tab.95

Tab.82 - Physical size of system components

190

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

270.4

287.3

154.6

Weight of system components

4.3 kg

MN.00273.E - 004

19

ALFOPLUS 18 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

19.1

FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

ITU-R F.595 and CEPT Rec. T/R 12-03 for RF channel arrangement

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3)

EN 60950-22 for Safety

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

19.2

GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

19.2.1
-

Available frequencies

Frequency band

see Tab.83
Tab.83 - Frequency band

FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]

REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION

17700 19700

1010

ITU-R F.595 - CEPT T/R 12-03

17700 19700

1560

ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7

17700 19700

1560

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

Modulation scheme

4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

Capacity

see Tab.84

RF filter range

Wide Filter Option (see Tab.85)

Transceiver tuning range

see Tab.85

MN.00273.E - 004

191

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.86 and Tab.87.


Tab.84 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
MODULATION TYPE

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

4QAMs

9.295

11.408

16.393

23.231

32.956

32.117

46.462

58.078

65.912

4QAM

10.872

15.328

22.025

31.213

44.279

47.183

62.426

78.033

88.558

16QAMs

16.225

22.875

32.870

46.581

66.081

70.414

93.163

116.454

132.161

16QAM

21.080

29.720

42.705

60.520

85.854

91.484

121.040

151.300

171.708

32QAM

24.483

34.517

49.599

70.289

99.713

106.251

140.578

175.723

199.425

64QAM

30.293

42.707

61.368

86.968

123.373

131.373

173.936

217.420

246.746

128QAM

36.102

50.898

73.137

103.647

147.034

156.675

207.294

259.117

294.068

256QAM

41.912

59.088

84.906

120.326

170.694

181.887

240.651

300.814

341.389

512QAM

47.763

67.279

96.759

137.004

194.524

207.100

274.009

342.511

389.048

1024QAM

53.572

75.469

108.529

153.683

218.185

232.312

307.336

384.208

436.369

Tab.85 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 18GHz


FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 19700 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz
ITU-R F.595 - CEPT REC T/R 12-03 - f0=18700 MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

RF Filter Range [MHz]

17699 18058

18709 19068

359

18016 18375

19026 19385

359

18332 18691

19342 19701

359

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 18140 MHz paired with 19260 19700 MHz GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

192

Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

RF Filter Range [MHz]

17700 18140

19260 19700

440

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.86 - 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 19700 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex7- GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz - 359 MHz
RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

17702.5

18054.5

18712.5

19064.5

14

17706

18051

18716

19061

28

17712.75

18044.25

18722.75

19054.25

56

17726.5

18030.5

18736.5

19040.5

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

18019.5

18371.5

19029.5

19381.5

14

18023

18368

19033

19378

28

18029.75

18361.25

19039.75

19371.25

56

18043.5

18347.5

19053.5

19357.5

SUB BAND 3
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

18335.5

18687.5

19345.5

19697.5

14

18339

18684

19349

19694

28

18345.75

18677.25

19355.75

19687.25

56

18359.5

18663.5

19369.5

19673.5

a. The actual channel bandwidth is compliant with a channel spacing of 7, 13.75, 27.5 and 55 MHz respectively

MN.00273.E - 004

193

Tab.87 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560
MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 18140 MHz paired with 19260 19700 MHz ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

17703.5

18136.5

19263.5

19696.5

14

17707

18133

19267

19693

28

17713.75

18126.25

19273.75

19686.25

56

17727.5

18112.5

19287.5

19672.5

Tab.88 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 19700 MHz FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

194

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

17705

18135

19265

19695

20

17710

18130

19270

19690

30

17715

18125

19275

19685

40

17720

18120

19280

19680

50

17725

18115

19295

19675

MN.00273.E - 004

19.2.2
-

Transmitter characteristics

Maximum transmit power

see Tab.89
Tab.89 - Maximum transmit power

MODULATION

Nominal Output Power


[dBm]

Guaranteed Output Power


[dBm]

4QAMs

23

21

4QAM

23

21

16QAMs

21

19

16QAM

21

19

32QAM

19

17

64QAM

19

17

128QAM

19

17

256QAM

19

17

512QAM

19

17

1024QAM

18

16

Nominal Power
Tolerance

2 dB

Transmit power with ACM

Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM


profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.

Tx bandwidth

see Tab.85

Frequency agility

following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz


steps

Built-in transmit power attenuation range

20 dB

Attenuation Step

1 dB step

RTPC attenuation range

20 dB

Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation

2 dB

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range

20 dB

ATPC Attenuation Step

Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

RF frequency stability

5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)

Muting attenuation:

60 dB

19.2.3
-

Receiver characteristics

Receiver bandwidth

MN.00273.E - 004

1 dB

see Tab.85

195

Noise Figure

7 dB

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

see Tab.90

Tab.90 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

ENBW [MHz]

6.1

10

8.6

14

12.2

20

17.2

28

24.4

30

26

40

34.4

50

43

56

48.8

Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

see Tab.91
Tab.91 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

196

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

7.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

9.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

7.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

9.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

MN.00273.E - 004

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

Guaranteed receiver sensitivities12 [dBm]

see Tab.92

Tab.92 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]


CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]
7

10

14

20

28

30

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

-92.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

BER=10-10

-90.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

BER=10-6

-91.5

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

BER=10-6

-91.5

-88.0

-85.0

-81.5

-79.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.0

-83.0

-79.5

-77.5

BER=10-6

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

BER=10-10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

BER=10-6

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

BER=10-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

12 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.

MN.00273.E - 004

197

40

50

56

BER=10-6

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

BER=10-10

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.0

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

BER=10-6

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

BER=10-10

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

-79.0

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

BER=10-10

-77.0

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

BER=10-6

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-75.5

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-6

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-6

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

-73.5

-70.0

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-10

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-6

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-10

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-6

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.0

BER=10-10

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.0

BER=10-6

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

BER=10-6

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

BER=10-10

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

Rx Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

AGC dynamic range

from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole


temperature range (PC reading)

3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6
4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm

Maximum input level for BER 10-6

-22 dBm

Residual BER (RBER)

10-12

Receiver Dynamic Range

13

(dB)

see Tab.93

13 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

198

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.93 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)


CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

57.5

55.0

51.5

48.5

46.5

44.0

40.5

38.0

36.0

35.0

10

56.5

53.5

51.0

47.0

45.0

42.5

39.0

36.5

33.5

29.5

14

56.5

53.0

50.0

46.5

44.5

42.0

38.5

35.5

33.0

32.5

20

55.0

51.5

48.5

45.0

43.0

40.5

37.0

34.0

31.0

27.0

28

53.5

50.0

46.5

43.5

42.0

39.0

36.0

32.5

30.5

30.0

30

53.0

49.5

46.0

43.0

14.5

38.5

35.5

32.0

29.5

25.5

40

52.0

48.5

45.0

42.0

40.0

37.5

34.5

31.0

28.5

24.0

50

51.0

47.5

44.0

41.0

39.0

36.5

33.5

30.0

27.5

23.0

56

50.5

47.0

43.5

40.5

38.5

36.0

33.0

29.5

27.0

22.5

19.2.4
-

Radio flange

Radio WG flange type

19.2.5

UBR 220

Power supply and consumption

Operating voltage range

48 Vdc 15%

Power consumption

see Tab.94
Tab.94 - Power consumption

19.2.6
-

Typical Power
Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)

33.5

35

Mechanical characteristics

Physical size of system components

see Tab.95

Tab.95 - Physical size of system components

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

270.4

287.3

154.6

Weight of system components

MN.00273.E - 004

4.3 kg

199

20

ALFOPLUS 23 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

20.1

FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

ITU-R F.637-3 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 13-02 for RF channel arrangement

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3).

EN 60950-22 for Safety

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

20.2

GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

20.2.1
-

Available frequencies

Frequency band

see Tab.96
Tab.96 - Frequency band

200

FREQUENCY RANGE
[MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]

REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION

22000 23600

1008

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3


CEPT T/R 13-02

21200 23600

1232

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1

21200 23600

1200

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4

21200 23600

1200

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

Modulation scheme:

4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

Capacity:

see Tab.97

MN.00273.E - 004

RF filter range:

Wide Filter Option see Tab.98

Transceiver tuning range:

See Tab.98

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.99, Tab.100 and Tab.101.
Tab.97 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

MODULATION TYPE

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

4QAMs

9.295

11.408

16.393

23.231

32.956

35.117

46.462

58.078

65.912

4QAM

10.872

15.328

22.025

31.213

44.279

47.183

62.426

78.033

88.558

16QAMs

16.225

22.875

32.870

46.581

66.081

70.414

93.163

116.454

132.161

16QAM

21.080

29.720

42.705

60.520

85.854

91.484

121.040

151.300

171.708

32QAM

24.483

34.517

49.599

70.289

99.713

106.251

140.578

175.723

199.425

64QAM

30.293

42.707

61.368

86.968

123.373

131.463

173.936

217.420

246.746

128QAM

36.102

50.898

73.137

103.647

147.034

156.675

207.294

259.117

294.068

256QAM

41.912

59.088

84.906

120.326

170.694

181.887

240.651

300.814

341.389

512QAM

47.763

67.279

96.759

137.004

194.524

207.100

274.009

342.511

389.048

1024QAM

53.572

75.469

108.529

153.529

218.185

232.312

307.336

384.208

436.369

Tab.98 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 23 GHz


FREQUENCY RANGE: 22000 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1008 MHz
ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - f0=21196 MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

22002.75 22338.75

23010.75 23346.75

22254.75 22590.75

23262.75 23598.75

RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
336

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHz


ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - f0=21196 MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]

21224 21616

22456 22848

392

21616 22008

22848 23240

392

22008 22344

23240 23576

336

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz


ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - f0=21196 MHz
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]

21200 21605.5

22400 22805.5

405.5

21600 22000

22800 23200

400

21997.5 22400

23197.5 23600

402.5

MN.00273.E - 004

201

Tab.99 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 22000 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1008 MHz - 336 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

22006.25

22335.25

23014.25

23343.25

14

22009.75

22331.75

23017.75

23339.75

28

22016.75

22324.75

23024.75

23332.75

56

22030.75

22310.75

23038.75

23318.75

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

202

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

22258.25

22587.25

23266.25

23595.25

14

22261.75

22583.75

23269.75

23591.75

28

22268.75

22576.75

23276.75

23584.75

56

22282.75

22562.75

23290.75

23570.75

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.100 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - 392336 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

21227.5

21612.5

22459.5

22844.5

14

21231

21609

22463

22841

28

21238

21602

22470

22834

56

21252

21588

22484

22820

SUB BAND 2
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

21619.5

22004.5

22851.5

23236.5

14

21623

22001

22855

23233

28

21630

21994

22862

23226

56

21644

21980

22876

23212

SUB BAND 3
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

22011.5

22340.5

23243.5

23572.5

14

22015

22337

23247

23569

28

22022

22330

23254

23562

56

22036

22316

23268

23548

MN.00273.E - 004

203

Tab.101 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - 400 402.5 - 405.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

21217

21602

22417

22802

14

21220.5

21598.5

22420.5

22798.5

28

21227.5

21591.5

22427.5

22791.5

56

21241.5

21577.5

22441.5

22777.5

SUB BAND 2
Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

21609

21994

22809

23194

14

21612.5

21990.5

22812.5

23190.5

28

21619.5

21983.5

22819.5

23183.5

56

21633.5

21969.5

22833.5

23169.5

SUB BAND 3
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

22001

22386

23201

23586

14

22004.5

22382.5

23204.5

23582.5

28

22011.5

22375.5

23211.5

23575.5

56

22025.5

22361.5

23225.5

23561.5

Tab.102 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - 405.5-400-402.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

204

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

21205

21600.5

22405

22800.5

20

21210

21595.5

22410

22795.5

30

21215

21590.5

22415

22790.5

40

21220

21585.5

22420

22785.5

MN.00273.E - 004

50

21225

21580.5

22425

21780.5

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

21605

21995

22805

23195

20

21610

21990

22810

23190

30

21615

21985

22815

23185

40

21620

21980

22820

23180

50

21625

21975

22825

23175

SUB BAND 3
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency
Carrier [MHz]

10

22002.5

22395

23202.5

23586

20

22007.5

22390

23207.5

23590

30

22012.5

22385

23212.5

23585

40

22017.5

22380

23217.5

23580

50

22022.5

22375

23222.5

23575

MN.00273.E - 004

205

20.2.2
-

Transmitter characteristics

Maximum transmit power

see Tab.103
Tab.103 - Maximum transmit power

206

MODULATION

Nominal Output Power


[dBm]

Guaranteed Output Power


[dBm]

4QAMs

23

21

4QAM

23

21

16QAMs

21

19

16QAM

21

19

32QAM

19

17

64QAM

19

17

128QAM

19

17

256QAM

19

17

512QAM

19

17

1024QAM

18

16

Nominal Power
Tolerance

2 dB

Transmit power with ACM

Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM


profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.

Tx bandwidth

see Tab.98

Frequency agility

following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at


250 kHz steps

Built-in transmit power attenuation range

20 dB

Attenuation Step

1 dB step

RTPC attenuation range

20 dB

Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation

2 dB

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range

20 dB

ATPC Attenuation Step

Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

RF frequency stability

5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)

Muting attenuation

60 db

1 dB

MN.00273.E - 004

20.2.3

Receiver characteristics

Receiver bandwidth

see Tab.98

Noise figure

7 dB

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

see Tab.104

Tab.104 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

ENBW [MHz]

6.1

10

8.6

14

12.2

20

17.2

28

24.4

30

26

40

34.4

50

43

56

48.8

Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

see Tab.105
Tab.105 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

MN.00273.E - 004

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

7.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

9.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

7.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

9.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

207

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

Guaranteed receiver sensitivities14 [dBm]

see Tab.106

14 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower

208

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.106 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]


CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]
7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

-92.5

-90.0

-86.5

-83.5

-81.5

BER=10-10

-90.5

-88.0

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

BER=10-6

-91.5

-88.5

-85.0

-82.0

-80.0

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

BER=10-6

-91.5

-88.0

-85.0

-81.5

-79.5

BER=10-10

-89.5

-86.0

-83.0

-79.5

-77.5

BER=10-6

-90.0

-86.5

-83.0

-80.0

-78.0

BER=10-10

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.0

BER=10-6

-88.5

-85.0

-81.5

-78.5

-77.0

BER=10-10

-86.5

-83.0

-79.5

-76.5

-75.0

BER=10-6

-88.0

-84.5

-81.0

-78.0

-76.5

BER=10-10

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.5

BER=10-6

-87.0

-83.5

-80.0

-77.0

-75.0

BER=10-10

-85.0

-81.5

-78.0

-75.0

-73.0

BER=10-6

-86.0

-82.5

-79.0

-76.0

-74.0

BER=10-10

-84.0

-80.5

-77.0

-74.0

-72.0

BER=10-6

-85.5

-82.0

-78.5

-75.5

-73.5

BER=10-10

-83.5

-80.0

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

-79.0

-75.5

-73.0

-70.0

-66.5

BER=10-10

-77.0

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

BER=10-6

-77.5

-74.0

-71.5

-68.5

-64.5

BER=10-10

-75.5

-72.0

-69.5

-66.5

-62.5

BER=10-6

-77.0

-73.5

-70.5

-67.5

-63.5

BER=10-10

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-6

-75.5

-72.0

-69.0

-66.0

-62.0

BER=10-10

-73.5

-70.0

-67.0

-64.0

-60.0

BER=10-6

-74.0

-71.0

-67.5

-65.0

-61.0

BER=10-10

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-6

-73.5

-70.5

-67.0

-64.5

-60.5

BER=10-10

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.5

BER=10-6

-72.5

-69.5

-66.0

-63.5

-59.0

BER=10-10

-70.5

-67.5

-64.0

-61.5

-57.0

BER=10-6

-71.5

-68.5

-65.0

-62.5

-58.0

BER=10-10

-69.5

-66.5

-63.0

-60.5

-56.0

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

10

14

20

28

30

40

50

MN.00273.E - 004

209

56

BER=10-6

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

-62.0

-57.5

BER=10-10

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

Rx Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

AGC dynamic range

from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

whole temperature range (PC reading)

3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm

Maximum input level for BER

Residual BER (RBER)

Receiver Dynamic Range

10-6

-22 dBm
10-12

15

(dB)

see Tab.107

Tab.107 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)


CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

57.5

55.0

51.5

48.5

46.5

44.0

40.5

38.0

35.0

31.5

10

57.5

53.5

50.0

47.0

45.0

42.5

39.0

36.5

33.5

29.5

14

56.5

53.0

50.0

46.5

44.5

42.0

38.5

35.5

33.0

32.5

20

55.0

51.5

48.0

45.0

43.0

40.5

37.0

34.0

31.0

27.0

28

53.5

50.0

46.5

43.5

42.0

39.0

36.0

32.5

30.5

30.0

30

53.0

49.5

46.0

43.0

41.5

38.5

35.5

32.0

29.5

25.5

40

52.0

48.5

45.0

42.0

40.0

37.5

34.5

31.0

28.5

24.0

50

51.0

47.5

44.0

51.0

39.0

36.5

33.5

30.0

27.5

23.0

56

50.5

47.0

43.5

40.5

38.5

36.0

33.0

29.5

27.0

22.5

20.2.4
-

Radio flange

Radio WG flange type

20.2.5

UBR220

Power supply and consumption

Operating voltage range

48 Vdc 15%

Power Consumption

see Tab.108

15 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

210

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.108 - Power Consumption

20.2.6
-

Typical Power
Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power
Consumption (W)

33.5

35

Mechanical characteristics

Physical size of system components

see Tab.109

Tab.109 - Physical size of system components

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Depth (mm)

270.4

287.3

154.6

Weight of system components

MN.00273.E - 004

4.3 kg

211

21

ALFOPLUS 38 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

21.1

FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

ITU-R F749-2 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-01 for RF channel arrangement

EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3).

EN 60950-22 for Safety

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

21.2

GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

21.2.1
-

Available frequencies

Frequency band

see Tab.110
Tab.110 - Frequency band

FREQUENCY RANGE
[MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING
[MHz]

REFERENCE
RECOMMENDATION

37000 39500

1260

ITU-R F749-2 - CEPT T/R 12-01

Modulation scheme

4QAMs/QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

Capacity

see Tab.111

RF filter range

Wide Filter Option (see Tab.112)

Transceiver tuning range

see Tab.112

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.113.

212

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.111 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

MODULATION TYPE

14

28

56

4QAMs

9.295

16.393

32.956

65.912

4QAM

10.872

22.025

44.279

88.558

16QAMs

16.225

32.870

66.081

132.161

16QAM

21.080

42.705

85.854

171.708

32QAM

24.483

49.599

99.713

199.425

64QAM

30.293

61.368

123.373

246.746

128QAM

36.102

73.137

147.034

294.068

256QAM

41.912

84.906

170.694

341.389

512QAM

47.763

96.759

194.524

389.048

1024QAM

53.572

108.529

218.185

436.369

Tab.112 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 38 GHz


FREQUENCY RANGE: 37058 39438 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1260 MHz
ITU-R F.749-2 Annex 1 and CEPT REC T/R 12-01 Annex A - f0=38248 MHz
Sub Band

Lower Half Limits


[MHz]

Upper Half Limits


[MHz]

37058 37618

38318 38878

37618 38178

38878 39438

RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
560

Tab.113 - 37058 MHz 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 37058 39438 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1260 MHz - 560 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

37061.5

37614.5

38321.5

38874.5

14

37065

37611

38325

38871

28

37072

37604

38332

38864

56

37086

37590

38346

38850

SUB BAND 2
Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)

Lower half of the band

Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

Lowest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency
Carrier (MHz)

37621.5

38174.5

38881.5

39434.5

14

37625

38171

38885

39431

28

37632

38164

38892

39424

56

37646

38150

38906

39410

MN.00273.E - 004

213

21.2.2
-

Transmitter characteristics

Maximum transmit power

see Tab.114
Tab.114 - Maximum transmit power

214

MODULATION

Nominal Output Power


(dBm)

Guaranteed Output
Power (dBm)

4QAMs

19

17

4QAM

19

17

16QAMs

17

15

16QAM

17

15

32QAM

15

13

64QAM

15

13

128QAM

15

13

256QAM

15

13

512QAM

15

13

1024QAM

14

12

Nominal Power
Tolerance

2 dB

Transmit power with ACM

Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM


profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode
is followed.

Tx bandwidth

see Tab.111

Frequency agility

following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz


steps

Built-in transmit power attenuation range

20 dB

Attenuation Step

1 dB step

RTPC attenuation range

20 dB

Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation

2 dB

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range

20 dB

ATPC Attenuation Step

Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

RF frequency stability

5 ppm
10 ppm (including ageing)

Muting attenuation

60 db

1 dB

MN.00273.E - 004

21.2.3

Receiver characteristics

Receiver bandwidth

see Tab.111

Noise Figure

9 dB

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz)

see Tab.115

Tab.115 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

ENBW (MHz)

6.4

14

12.2

28

24.4

56

48.8

Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

see Tab.116
Tab.116 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

16

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

18

20

BER=10-6

6.5

13.5

15.5

18

BER=10-10

8.5

11

15.5

17.5

20

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33.5

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35.5

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

BER=10-6

20.5

23.5

26.5

30

33

BER=10-10

22.5

25.5

28.5

32

35

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

Guaranteed receiver sensitivities16 (dBm)

see Tab.117

16 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower

MN.00273.E - 004

215

Tab.117 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm)


CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]
7

14

28

56

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

BER=10-6

-90.5

-88

-84.5

-81.5

-79.5

BER=10-10

-88.5

-86.0

-82.5

-79.5

-77.5

BER=10-6

-89.5

-86

-83

-79.5

-77.5

BER=10-10

-87.5

-84.0

-81.0

-77.5

-75.5

BER=10-6

-86.5

-83

-79.5

-76.5

-75

BER=10-10

-84.5

-81.0

-77.5

-74.5

-73.0

BER=10-6

-83.5

-80

-76.5

-73.5

-71.5

BER=10-10

-81.5

-78.0

-74.5

-71.5

-69.5

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

BER=10-6

-77.0

-73.5

-71.0

-68.0

-64.5

BER=10-10

-75.0

-71.5

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

BER=10-6

-75.0

-71.5

-68.5

-65.5

-61.5

BER=10-10

-73.0

-69.5

-66.5

-63.5

-59.5

BER=10-6

-72.0

-69.0

-65.5

-63.0

-59.0

BER=10-10

-70.0

-67.0

-63.5

-61.0

-57.0

BER=10-6

-69.0

-66.0

-62.5

-60.0

-55.5

BER=10-10

-67.0

-64.0

-60.5

-58.0

-53.5

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]


7

14

28

56

Rx Spurious emissions

according to ETSI EN 301 390

AGC dynamic range

from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C (PC reading)2dB in the range -22dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6

Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole


temperature range (PC reading)

3dB in the range -50dBm Thresholds @


BER=10-6
4dB in the range -49dBm -22dBm

Maximum input level for BER 10-6

-22 dBm

Residual BER (RBER)

10-12

Receiver Dynamic Range

17

(dB)

see Tab.118

Tab.118 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)


CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
[MHz]

4QAMs

4QAM

16QAMs

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

55.5

53

49.5

46.5

44.5

42

38.5

36

33

29.5

14

54.5

51

48

44.5

42.5

40

36.5

33.5

30.5

26.5

28

51.5

48

44.5

41.5

40

37

34

30.5

28

24

56

48.5

45

41.5

38.5

36.5

34

31

27.5

25

20.5

17 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

216

MN.00273.E - 004

21.2.4
-

Radio flange

Radio WG flange type

21.2.5

UBR 320

Power supply and consumption

Operating voltage range

48 Vdc 15%

Power consumption

see Tab.119
Tab.119 - Power consumption

21.2.6
-

Typical Power
Consumption [W]

Guaranteed Power
Consumption [W]

34

36

Mechanical characteristics

Physical size of system components

see Tab.120

Tab.120 - Physical size of system components

Width [mm]

Height [mm]

Depth [mm]

270.4

287.3

154.6

Weight of system components

MN.00273.E - 004

4.3 Kg

217

218

MN.00273.E - 004

Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES

22

LIST OF FIGURES

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 10


Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 10
Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 10
Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 10
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 11
Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view ...................................................................................... 20
Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network ............................................................... 21
Fig.8 - In-band management .......................................................................................... 22
Fig.9 - Drop node .......................................................................................................... 22
Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only) ..................................................................................... 22
Fig.11 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector) .................................................................... 48
Fig.12 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector) .................................................................... 48
Fig.13 - PoE injector interface ......................................................................................... 49
Fig.14 - ALFOplus GE ..................................................................................................... 53
Fig.15 - ALFOplus GO..................................................................................................... 54
Fig.16 - ALFOplus block diagram ..................................................................................... 57
Fig.17 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 59
Fig.18 - ATPC diagram ................................................................................................... 61
Fig.19 - Available loops .................................................................................................. 62
Fig.20 -........................................................................................................................ 65
Fig.21 - Red curve......................................................................................................... 66
Fig.22 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled ................................................................. 68
Fig.23 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled ................................................................. 68
Fig.24 - Header compression .......................................................................................... 70
Fig.25 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 71
Fig.26 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains ...................................................... 73

MN.00273.E - 004

219

Fig.27 - Node B and BTS synch ....................................................................................... 77


Fig.28 - SETS circuit ...................................................................................................... 77
Fig.29 - Synchronisation menu........................................................................................ 78
Fig.30 - Sources of synchronisation ................................................................................. 79
Fig.31 - Provide synchronism .......................................................................................... 80
Fig.32 - LAN synchronisation method ............................................................................... 82
Fig.33 - Grounding connection ........................................................................................ 87
Fig.34 - ODU with standard coupling kit ........................................................................... 95
Fig.35 - 1+0 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 96
Fig.36 - Polarization disk ................................................................................................ 97
Fig.37 - 1+1 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 98
Fig.38 - 1+0 antenna flange ........................................................................................... 99
Fig.39 - 1+1 antenna flange ......................................................................................... 100
Fig.40 - Functional drawing........................................................................................... 102
Fig.41 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)..................................................... 102
Fig.42 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view .............................. 102
Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector ............................................................... 103
Fig.44 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable ............................................................. 104
Fig.45 - RJ-45 Pinout ................................................................................................... 105
Fig.46 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly ...................................................................... 105
Fig.47 ........................................................................................................................ 105
Fig.48 ........................................................................................................................ 106
Fig.49 ........................................................................................................................ 107
Fig.50 - Cable connector keys ....................................................................................... 108
Fig.51 -...................................................................................................................... 109
Fig.52 ........................................................................................................................ 109
Fig.53 - PO0032 .......................................................................................................... 110
Fig.54 - Connector positions ......................................................................................... 111
Fig.55 ........................................................................................................................ 112
Fig.56 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only.................................................................. 114
Fig.57 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)............................ 115
Fig.58 - ALFOplus connectors ........................................................................................ 116
Fig.59 - SFP LC/LC ...................................................................................................... 116
Fig.60 - SFP LC/OPEN END ........................................................................................... 116
Fig.61 - SFP LC/ SFP LC ............................................................................................... 117
Fig.62 - LC connector................................................................................................... 117
Fig.63 - SFP into ALFOplus............................................................................................ 117
Fig.64 - Locked connection ........................................................................................... 118
Fig.65 - Unplug SFP ..................................................................................................... 118
Fig.66 - IP address setting............................................................................................ 121
Fig.67 - Local area connection....................................................................................... 121
Fig.68 - Rescue login ................................................................................................... 122
Fig.69 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID ................................................................. 123

220

MN.00273.E - 004

Fig.70 - Frequency and power setting ............................................................................ 124


Fig.71 - Port configuration ............................................................................................ 125
Fig.72 - Equipment properties ....................................................................................... 125
Fig.73 - Remote element list ......................................................................................... 126
Fig.74 - Main menu with Rx signal power level ................................................................ 128
Fig.75 - S/N measurement monitoring ........................................................................... 128
Fig.76 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment ..................................................................... 129
Fig.77 - Antenna aiming block....................................................................................... 130
Fig.78 - Software download procedure ........................................................................... 132
Fig.79 - Upgrade software ............................................................................................ 132
Fig.80 - Backup/Restore configuration............................................................................ 134
Fig.81 - Current alarm monitoring ................................................................................. 141
Fig.82 - Event log window ............................................................................................ 142
Fig.83 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit............................................................... 144
Fig.84 - Local access only ............................................................................................. 145
Fig.85 - VLAN based in-band management ..................................................................... 146
Fig.86 - VLAN based In-band drop node ......................................................................... 146
Fig.87 - Out-of-band management................................................................................. 147

MN.00273.E - 004

221

222

MN.00273.E - 004

23

LIST OF TABLES

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................. 9


Tab.2 - Go-return frequency ............................................................................................23
Tab.3 - Tx power............................................................................................................25
Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled) ................................................................26
Tab.5 - Noise figure ........................................................................................................38
Tab.6 - ACM switching thresholds .....................................................................................39
Tab.7 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus .....................................................43
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression..45
Tab.9 - Interface characteristics .......................................................................................46
Tab.10 - Power consumption (W) .....................................................................................46
Tab.11 - PoE injector supported .......................................................................................47
Tab.12 - Code Table .......................................................................................................48
Tab.13 - Electrical characteristics .....................................................................................49
Tab.14 - Connectors .......................................................................................................49
Tab.15 - Description of alarms .........................................................................................49
Tab.16 - Type ................................................................................................................50
Tab.17 - Maximum length................................................................................................50
Tab.18 - ODU dimension .................................................................................................51
Tab.19 - bootstrap status display .....................................................................................56
Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions ........................................................................................88
Tab.21 - Torques for tightening screws..............................................................................91
Tab.22 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency .................................................94
Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable ....................................................................................... 101
Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector....................................................................................... 103
Tab.25 - Part to be assembled ....................................................................................... 103
Tab.26 - List of Amphenol optical cable ........................................................................... 113
Tab.27 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port ..................................................................... 127
Tab.28 - Ethernet connection stability ............................................................................. 131
Tab.29 - Alarms ........................................................................................................... 136
Tab.30 - Configurations................................................................................................. 145
Tab.31 - RF band and RF filter band ............................................................................... 150
Tab.32 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 156
Tab.33 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 157
Tab.34 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz.................................................................. 157
Tab.35 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 158
Tab.36 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 159
Tab.37 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Fre-

MN.00273.E - 004

223

quency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 159


Tab.38 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 500 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 160
Tab.39 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 161
Tab.40 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] .................................................................... 162
Tab.41 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................ 162
Tab.42 ........................................................................................................................163
Tab.43 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB] ........................................................................... 164
Tab.44 - Power consumption.......................................................................................... 165
Tab.45 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 165
Tab.46 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 166
Tab.47 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 167
Tab.48 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz .............................................................. 167
Tab.49 - 12.75 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................ 168
Tab.50 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 169
Tab.51 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth .............................................................................. 170
Tab.52 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................ 170
Tab.53 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 171
Tab.54 - Receiver Dynamic Range .................................................................................. 172
Tab.55 - Power consumption.......................................................................................... 172
Tab.56 - Physical size of system components .................................................................. 172
Tab.57 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 173
Tab.58 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 174
Tab.59 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz ............................................................. 175
Tab.60 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ............... 176
Tab.61 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits.................. 177
Tab.62 - 14501 - 15348 MHz band - Go-Return 728 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ............... 178
Tab.63 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 322 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ............... 179
Tab.64 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 315 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ............... 180
Tab.65 -Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 181
Tab.66 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ..................................................................... 182
Tab.67 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ................................................................................. 182
Tab.68 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 183
Tab.69 - Receiver Dynamic Range .................................................................................. 184
Tab.70 - Power consumption.......................................................................................... 184
Tab.71 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 184
Tab.72 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 185
Tab.73 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment . 186
Tab.74 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 17GHz .............................................................. 186
Tab.75 - 17100 MHz 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ........ 186
Tab.76 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 187
Tab.77 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ..................................................................... 188
Tab.78 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 188

224

MN.00273.E - 004

Tab.79 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 189


Tab.80 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 189
Tab.81 - Power consumption.......................................................................................... 190
Tab.82 - Physical size of system components .................................................................. 190
Tab.83 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 191
Tab.84 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment . 192
Tab.85 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 18GHz .............................................................. 192
Tab.86 - 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits ............. 193
Tab.87 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560 MHz
- Frequency carrier limits ............................................................................................... 194
Tab.88 - 17700 MHz 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................................. 194
Tab.89 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 195
Tab.90 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ..................................................................... 196
Tab.91 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 196
Tab.92 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 197
Tab.93 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 199
Tab.94 - Power consumption.......................................................................................... 199
Tab.95 - Physical size of system components .................................................................. 199
Tab.96 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 200
Tab.97 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 201
Tab.98 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 23 GHz ............................................................. 201
Tab.99 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .................................................................. 202
Tab.100 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 203
Tab.101 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 204
Tab.102 - 21200 MHz 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz Frequency carrier limits.................................................................................................. 204
Tab.103 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 206
Tab.104 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ................................................................... 207
Tab.105 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ............................................................................... 207
Tab.106 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] ........................................................... 209
Tab.107 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................ 210
Tab.108 - Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 211
Tab.109 - Physical size of system components ................................................................ 211
Tab.110 - Frequency band ............................................................................................. 212
Tab.111 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 213
Tab.112 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 38 GHz ........................................................... 213
Tab.113 - 37058 MHz 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits .... 213
Tab.114 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 214
Tab.115 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz) .................................................................. 215
Tab.116 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) ............................................................................... 215
Tab.117 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm) ............................................................ 216

MN.00273.E - 004

225

Tab.118 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ......................................................................... 216


Tab.119 - Power consumption ........................................................................................ 217
Tab.120 - Physical size of system components ................................................................. 217

226

MN.00273.E - 004

24

ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.

MN.00273.E - 004

227

228

MN.00273.E - 004